Skip to main content

Full text of "Notes on military orthopaedics"

See other formats


iin 


fOTES  ON  MILITARY 
ORTHOPAEDICS 


^gs*^ 


NOTES  ON 
MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


Nil 
3 


By 

(Colonel  Sir)  Robert  Jones,  C.B. 

Inspector  of  Military  Orthopaedics,  Army  Medical  Service 


With  an  Introductory  Note  by 

Surgeon-General  Sir  Alfred  Keogh,  G.C.B. 

Director-General,  Army  Medical  Service 


ILLUSTRATED 


Published  for  the  British   Red  Cross  Society  by 

GASSELL  AND  COMPANY,  LTD 

London,  New  York,  Toronto  and  Melbourne 

1917 


Deoicateo  to 
HIS   MAJESTY  KING  MANUEL 

In    recognition   of  his  sympathy,  co-operation   and 

enthusiasm  in  the  promotion  of  Orthopaedic  Centres 

for    disabled    soldiers,    and   as    a    small   tribute   of 

personal   gratitude  and  esteem. 


PREFACE 

THIS  little  work  is  published  in  the  hope  that  it  may 
perhaps  be  of  some  service  to  surgeons  engaged  in 
military  work.  It  is  an  attempt  to  formulate  rules  for 
the  application  of  orthopaedic  principles  to  the  treatment 
of  injuries  received  in  war. 

The  foresight  of  the  War  Office  and  the  sympathetic 
generosity  of  the  British  Red  Cross  Society  have  enabled 
us  to  open  Orthopaedic  Centres  in  many  of  the  principal 
towns  of  the  British  Isles,  and  to  equip  them  so  that 
the  surgeon  may  have  at  his  disposal  every  facility 
likely  to  develop  and  perfect  treatment. 

The  "  curative  workshops  "  started  in  each  centre 
owe  their  existence  and  success  to  the  initiative  and 
inspiring  enthusiasm  of  King  Manuel,  who  has  acted  as 
representative  of  the  British  Red  Cross  Society.  These 
workshops  have  already  proved  to  be  of  very  real 
value,  and  are  the  latest  but  not  least  important  advance 
in  the  orthopaedic  treatment  of  wounded  men  suffering 
from  physical  disabilities  of  their  limbs. 

By  the  time  a  soldier  has  passed  through  various 
phases  of  recovery  from  septic  wounds  in  several  different 
hospitals  and  is  finally  transferred  to  an  Orthopaedic 
Centre  for  treatment  to  correct  deformity  and  restore 
the  use  of  injured  joints  and  muscles,  his  spirit  is 
often  broken.  The  shock  of  injury,  frequently  in  itself 
severe,  followed  in  succession  by  a  long  period  of  sup- 
puration, and  then  by  a  wearisome  convalescence,  during 
which  he  receives  treatment  by  massage  or  electricity, 
or  by  monotonous  movement  with  mechanical  appa- 
ratus of  the  Zander  type,  too  often  leaves  him  dis- 
contented with  hospital  life,  its  monotonous  round  of 
routine,  and  its  long  periods  of  idleness. 

In  the  Orthopaedic  Centre  he  finds  his  fellow-patients 
busily  engaged  in  employments  in  which  they  are 


viii  PREFACE 

doing  something,  and  it  is  not  many  days  before  he 
asks  for  a  "  job." 

In  the  Military  Orthopaedic  Hospital  at  Shepherd's 
Bush  alone,  out  of  800  patients  about  500  are  employed 
at  some  regular  work,  which  fosters  habits  of  diligence 
and  self-respect,  and  converts  indolent  and  often  dis- 
contented patients  into  happy  men  who  soon  begin  to 
feel  that  they  are  becoming  useful  members  of  society 
and  not  mere  derelicts. 

Thus,  when  the  preliminary  stages  of  operative  and 
surgical  treatment  are  over,  there  is  a  steady  gradation 
through  massage  and  exercise  to  productive  work, 
which  is  commenced  as  soon  as  the  man  can  really 
begin  to  use  his  limb  at  all.  If  his  former  trade  or 
employment  is  a  suitable  one,  he  is  put  to  use  tools 
he  understands,  otherwise  some  occupation  suitable 
for  his  disability,  and  curative  in  its  character,  is  found 
for  him. 

Men  with  stiff  ankles  are  set  to  drive  a  treadle  lathe 
or  fretsaw.  If  put  on  a  treadle-exercising  machine  the 
monotony  soon  wearies  the  mind,  but  if  the  mind  is 
engaged  not  on  the  monotony  of  the  foot  work,  but  on 
the  interest  of  the  work  turned  out,  neither  mind  nor 
body  becomes  tired. 

Men  with  defective  elbows  and  shoulders  find  exercise 
and  mental  diversion  in  the  carpenter's  and  blacksmith's 
shops.  If  their  hands  and  fingers  are  stiff,  working  with 
a  big  swab  to  clean  windows  or  with  a  paint  brush  is  a 
more  interesting  occupation  than  gripping  spring  dumb- 
bells. 

Those  of  us  who  have  any  imagination  cannot  fail  to 
realize  the  difference  in  atmosphere  and  moral  in  hospitals 
where  the  patients  have  nothing  to  do  but  smoke,  play 
cards,  or  be  entertained,  from  that  found  in  those  where 
for  part  of  the  day  they  have  regular,  useful  and  pro- 
ductive work. 

Massage  and  exercise  is  no  longer  a  mere  routine  :  it 
all  fits  in  and  leads  up  to  the  idea  of  fitness — fitness 
to  work  and  earn  a  living  and  serve  the  State  in  an 
economic  sense,  even  if  not  to  return  to  the  regiment  and 
fight  once  more  in  the  ranks  of  the  Army. 

I  have  to  thank  the  Hon.  Arthur  Stanley  and  Sir 
Robert  Hudson  for  their  unfailing  help  and  encourage- 
ment in  connection  with  the  Orthopaedic  Centres  ; 


PREFACE  ix 

Miss  Perks  for  her  drawings ;  and  my  friends  Dr. 
Dawson  Williams  and  Lt.-Col.  J.  Lynn  Thomas,  C.B., 
for  help  and  advice  in  connection  with  the  proofs. 

To  my  friend  and  colleague,  Mr.  Aitken,  who  has  long 
been  associated  with  me  in  my  work,  and  who  is  con- 
versant with  my  methods,  I  am  much  indebted  for 
help  in  this  as  well  as  in  other  writings. 

R.  J. 

March,  1917. 


THE  several  chapters  of  this  volume  appeared 
as  a  series  of  articles  in  the  British  Medical 
Journal  during  1916,  and  I  desire  to  express 
my  acknowledgment  for  permission  to  re- 
publish  them  in  book  form. 

R.  J. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

INTRODUCTORY  NOTE.    BY  SURGEON-GENERAL 
SIR  ALFRED  KEOGH          ....     xiii 

CHAPTER 

1.  POSITIONS  OF  ELECTION  FOR  ANKYLOSIS  FOL- 

LOWING GUN-SHOT  INJURIES  OF  JOINTS    .         i 

2.  SUTURE     OF     NERVES,     AND     ALTERNATIVE 

METHODS  OF  TREATMENT  BY  TRANSPLANTA- 
TION OF  TENDON     .....         9 

3.  THE  SOLDIER'S  FOOT,  AND  THE  TREATMENT 

OF  COMMON  DEFORMITIES  OF  THE  FOOT    .       27 

4.  MALUNITED  AND  UNUNITED  FRACTURES         .       60 

5.  TRANSPLANTATION  OF  BONE,  AND  SOME  USES 

OF  THE  BONE  GRAFT  81 

6.  DISABILITIES  OF  THE  KNEE-JOINT          .          .       96 

7.  THE  MECHANICAL  TREATMENT  OF  FRACTURES 

UNDER  WAR  CONDITIONS  .          .          .no 

INDEX    .          .          .          .-       .          /        .     129 


INTRODUCTORY   NOTE 

By  SURGEON-GENERAL  SIR  ALFRED   KEOGH, 
G.C.B. 

OF  the  many  surgical  problems  which  have  needed 
especial  attention  during  the  past  two  years,  none  equals 
in  importance  those  generally  known  as  the  ortho- 
paedic. The  term  has  been  extended  to  include  cases 
not  hitherto  comprehended  as  belonging  to  this  branch 
of  surgery,  and  the  wider  application  of  orthopaedic 
principles  has  been  forced  upon  us  by  their  special  im- 
portance at  the  present  time. 

This  importance  rests  not  merely  on  surgical,  military, 
or  even  humanitarian  considerations.  The  problem  of 
the  maimed  and  discharged  soldier  has  leaped  into 
prominence,  and  we  are  forced  by  grave  social  and 
economic  considerations  to  devote  our  attention  not 
merely  to  procuring  a  sound  administrative  system  to 
solve  it,  but  to  securing  the  highest  professional  efficiency 
to  ensure  the  best  results. 

The  publication  of  such  a  work  as  this  is  at  the  moment 
most  opportune.  The  long  experience  and  the  reputa- 
tion of  the  author  will  be  to  the  profession  its  best  com- 
mendation, but  I  may  be  allowed  to  take  advantage  of 
the  opportunity  which  its  appearance  affords  of  com- 
mending the  subject  generally  to  the  attention  of  the 
profession.  If  within  the  domain  of  Orthopaedic  Sur- 
gery we  include  the  many  varieties  of  disabilities  which, 
for  administrative  reasons,  we  are  now  bound  to  con- 
sider as  coming  within  the  scope  of  this  branch  of  sur- 
gery, it  follows  that  the  general  surgeon,  no  less  than  the 
orthopaedist,  is  directly  concerned  with  the  subject.  A 
wider  extension  of  surgical  work  becomes,  therefore, 
imperative.  Indeed,  no  one  who  has  had  his  attention 
drawn  to  the  after-effects  of  some  forms  of  treatment 


xiv  INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

can  hesitate  to  recognize  that  unless  the  general  surgeon 
is  concerned  with  the  after-treatment  of  cases,  the 
efficacy  or  inefficacy  of  original  procedures  will  often 
be  unknown  to  him.  We  are  here  concerned  with  con- 
ditions necessarily  entirely  different  from  those  of  civil 
life.  The  military  surgeon's  connection  with  his  case 
is  often  brief  ;  cases  pass  from  one  surgeon  to  another 
with  extreme  rapidity ;  few  surgeons  see  their  patients 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end.  One  could  well  wish 
that  there  was  no  evil  in  this.  But  there  is  much  of 
evil,  and  not  the  least  is  the  fact  that  the  orthopaedic 
surgeon's  work  is  enormously  increased. 

But  it  is  not  merely  the  methods  of  cure  which,  for 
many  years  to  come,  will  confront  the  surgeon.  The 
relation  of  disabilities  to  earning  capacity  is  one  of  the 
most  important  problems  of  the  day.  A  large  part  of 
this  subject  comes  within  the  domain  of  Orthopaedic 
Surgery,  and,  indeed,  the  relation  of  physical  infirmity 
to  industrial  work  has  become  a  question  of  no  little 
moment. 

If  this  work  brings  home  to  the  surgeon  the  necessity 
for  a  correlation  between  early  and  late  surgical  pro- 
cedures, and  at  the  same  time  succeeds  in  obtaining 
for  the  discharged  and  disabled  soldier  the  same  sur- 
gical interest  as  is  displayed  on  his  behalf  in  the 
earlier  days  of  his  incapacity,  it  will  prove  to  be  a 
very  solid  contribution  to  national  efficiency. 

ALFRED  KEOGH. 


NOTES   ON 
MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 


CHAPTER  I 

POSITIONS  OF  ELECTION  FOR  ANKYLOSIS 
FOLLOWING  GUNSHOT  INJURIES  OF  JOINTS 

THERE  are  certain  injuries  to  joints  occurring  after 
gunshot  wounds  which  must  inevitably  end  in  bony 
ankylosis.  From  their  very  nature  some  of  these  will 
not  admit  of  excision. 

When  a  joint  has  been  shattered,  and  the  muscles 
governing  it  have  been  in  part  or  wholly  destroyed, 
excision  is  not  merely  difficult  from  the  point  of  view 
of  surgical  technique,  but  often  results,  in  a  flail-articula- 
tion which  renders  the  limb  quite  useless.  This  is 
especially  the  case  when  such  joints  as  the  shoulder, 
elbow,  and  wrist  are  concerned.  Excisions  of  the  upper 
part  of  the  humerus  are  frequently  practised  as  a  con- 
servative procedure  in  the  presence  of  acute  or  persistent 
sepsis,  especially  at  the  French  front.  This  may  be 
very  necessary,  but  the  resulting  condition  will  at  a 
later  date  require  further  surgical  intervention.  The 
question  has  often  been  put  to  me :  "  What  should  be 
done  with  these  flail-joints,  and,  if  ankylosis  is  to  be 
expected,  -in  what  position  should  the  joint  be  placed 
in  order  to  be  of  the  greatest  use  to  the  patient  ?  " 
The  question  as  to  flail-joints  will  be  considered  at  the 
end  of  this  chapter,  but  in  the  first  place  it  may  be  of 
service  to  indicate  briefly  the  conclusions  as  to  the 
positions  for_ankylosis  to  which  experience  has  ledjne.  j 

SHOULDER-JOINT 

Position. — The  arm  should  be  abducted  to  about 
50°  (Figs,  i  and  2).  The  elbow  should  be  slightly  in 
front  of  the  coronal  plane  of  the  body  (Fig.  2),  so  that 
when  it  is  at  right  angles  and  the  forearm  supinated, 

B 


2   NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

the  palm  of  the  hand  is  towards  the  face.  The  arm 
is  placed  in  this  position  while  the  scapula  retains  its 
normal  position  of  rest. 

Reasons. — If  the  arm  be  correctly  placed,  the  hand 
(Fig.  3)  can  be  brought  easily  to  the  mouth  by  bending 
the  elbow.  Further,  the  humerus  being  fixed  to  the 
scapula  at  the  angle  indicated,  the  arm  can  be  lifted 
to  a  considerable  height  by  scapular  action  (Fig.  4)  ; 
moreover,  pockets  can  be  reached,  the  hair  brushed, 
and  the  patient  can  pick  up  a  plate  or  cup  without 
spilling  the  contents. 

The  arm  should  never  be  kept  to  the  patient's  side  if 


Figs.  1  and  2.— To  illustrate 

the  position  for  ankylosis  of 

the  shoulder  in  abduction. 


ankylosis  is  feared,  for  in  such  a  case  the  functional 
result  must  be  most  unsatisfactory  ;  not  only  will  it  be 
difficult  to  reach  many  parts  of  the  body,  but  difficult 
also  to  reach  across  a  table  or  to  perform  many  simple 
movements  constantly  recurring  in  everyday  life.  Flail 
shoulder- joints  also  should  be  ankylosed  in  the  position 
described,  and  joints  which  have  been  allowed  to 
ankylose  in  an  adducted  position  (Figs.  5  A,  56)  may 
require  osteotomy  of  the  humerus  high  up  to  correct 
this  faulty  position.  The  shoulder-joint  should  never 
be  allowed  to  become  fixed  at  right  angles  to  the  side 
in  adults,  as  in  that  case  the  patient  will  be  unable  to 
bring  his  arm  down  to  his  side. 

It  is  to  be  clearly  understood  that  I  am  dealing  with 
injuries  to  soldiers  and  sailors,  and  not  with  children,  in 
whom  other  means  can  be  adopted  owing  to  anatomical 
considerations. 


POSITIONS  FOR  ANKYLOSIS  3 

ELBOW-JOINT 

Position. — The  proper  course  to  adopt  will  depend 
upon  the  patient  and  his  calling,  but  by  far  the  greater 
number  of  men  would  prefer  the  fixation  to  be  at  just 
below  a  right  angle — that  is,  about  70°  (Fig.  6).  The 
ankylosis  commonly  met  with  at  130°  is  not  useful. 
It  is  important  to  bear  in  mind  that  in  cases  in  which 
both  elbows  will  become  ankylosed  it  is  necessary  to  fix 
the  one  at  an  angle  of  110°,  and  the  other  at  70°  as 
recommended  for  one-sided  trouble  (Fig.  7). 


Fig»-  3  and  4. — Ankylosis  of  the  shoulder  in  abduction  to  show  (Fig.  3) 
degree  of  abduction,  (Fig.  4)  the  degree  of  power  of  lifting  the  arm. 

Reasons. — This  position  enables  the  patient  to  move 
his  hand  to  his  mouth,  button  his  clothes,  brush  his 
hair,  and  reach  over  a  table.  At  an  angle  less  than  a 
right  angle  it  is  certainly  more  easy  to  get  the  hand 
to  the  mouth  and  to  various  parts  of  the  head,  but 
limitations  in  other  directions  more  than  counterbalance 
these  advantages. 

FOREARM 

Position. — If  the  movements  of  pronation  and  supina- 
tion  are  lost,  the  radius  should  be  fixed  midway  between 
pronation  and  supination. 


4  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Reasons — The  hand  is  more  useful  for  dressing  and 
eating  and  for  manual  labour  in  this  position.  A  minor 
advantage  is  that  of  appearance. 


Fig.  5  A  shows  faulty  adducted  position  of  arm.  and  Fig.  5  B  the 
consequent  extremely  limited  power  of  abduction. 

WRIST-JOINT 

Position.  —All  injuries  of  the  wrist-joint  should  be 
treated  with  the  wrist  dorsiflexed  (Figs.  8,  121,  and  123). 


Fig.  6. — Ankylosis  of  elbcw- 
joint  at  70°. 


Fig.  7.— Right  elbow  aot  110°.  left 
elbow  at  70°. 


This  is  a  priceless  surgical  axiom,  the  neglect  of  which 
is  grave. 

It  is  an  urgent  necessity  where  ankylosis  is  expected, 
or  where  even  limitation  in  movement  is  likely  to  occur. 

The  common  deformity  of  palmar  flexion  occurs 
when  no  splint  is  applied,  or  from  the  use  of  a  straight 


POSITIONS   FOR  ANKYLOSIS  5 

splint ;  in  all  cases  in  which  the  arm  and  fingers  are 
kept  on  such  a  splint,  palmar  flexion  of  the  wrist  occurs, 
and  this  condition  is  a  lifelong  handicap  to  the  usefulness 
of  the  hand. 

Reasons. — The  grip  of  the  fingers  is  diminished  if 
the  wrist  is  palmar-flexed.  The  strong  flexors  over- 
power the  extensors  of  the  fingers,  and  in  consequence 
proper  co-ordination  of  the  finger  movements  is  im- 
paireVl.  The  grasp  of  the  hand  is  strongest  when  the 
wrist  is  in  the  dorsiflexed  position,  the  balance  between 
the  flexors  and  extensors  is  better  preserved,  and  the 
co-ordinated  movement  of  the  fingers  is  secured. 

The  splints  required  are  simple. 

In  proof  of  the  importance  I  attach  to  the  dorsiflexed 


Fig.- 8. — Dorsiflexion  of  the  wrist. 

ankylosed  wrist,  I  may  state  that  I  always  restore  hyper- 
extension  of  the  ankylosed  joint  from  the  position  of 
flexion  by  manipulation  or  incision.  This  invariably 
improves  the  grip  of  the  fingers. 

Apart  from  the  impairment  of  function,  a  flexed  wrist 
is  unsightly. 

HIP-JOINT 

Position. — Ankylosis  should  be  encouraged  in  a 
position  of  very  slight  abduction,  with  thigh  extended 
and  very  slight  outward  rotation  (Fig.  9). 

Reasons. — The  common  deformity  in  ankylosis  of 
the  hip  is  flexion,  adduction,  and  internal  rotation  (Fig. 
10),  which  is  the  characteristic  position  we  find  in  an 
untreated  or  imperfectly  treated  tuberculous  hip-joint ; 
it  leads  to  lumbar  lordosis  and  an  ugly  limp.  Adduction 
deformity  brings  the  limb  too  near  the  middle  line, 
interferes  with  the  normal  position  of  the  sound  limb 
in  walking,  and,  by  involving  abduction  of  the  sound 
limb,  interferes  also  with  a  free  gait. 

If  the  hip-joint  is  ankylosed  in  the  fully  extended 
position,  lordosis  and  the  consequent  trouble  from  back- 
ache are  avoided,  and  there  is  freer  pelvic  movement  in 
walking  if  the  thigh  is  slightly  abducted. 

The  limb  should  be  very  slightly  rotated  outwards,  to 
avoid  the  unsightly  lift  of  the  pelvis  as  the  patient  rises 
on  his  toes  when  walking,  due  to  the  immobile  condition 


6  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

of  the  hip-joint.     This  gives  an  easier  walk  than  if  the 
toes  are  pointed  straight  forward. 


KNEE 

Position. — This  joint  should  be  fixed  in  an  extended 
position. 

Reasons. — Very  good  reasons  may  be  given  in  favour 
of  slight  flexion  from  the  point  of  view  of  elegance  in 
repose  and  that  of  ease  in  mounting  stairs.  Due 
weight  should  be  given  to  these  arguments,  but  in  the 


Figs.  9  and  10. — Ankylosis  of  hip.     (9)  Correct  position,  in  slitht  abduction 

with  extended  thigh  and  slight  outward  rotation.     (10)  Faulty  position  of 

ankylosis  in  flexion  with  adduction  and  internal  rotation. 

case  of  war  injuries  the  straight  position  obviates  many 
risks.  Ankylosis,  as  we  know,  is  not  necessarily  bony  ; 
when  it  is  fibrous  the  tendency  is  for  the  flexion  angle 
to  increase  by  exercise.  The  incidence  of  the  body 
weight  on  a  slightly  bent  knee,  unless  the  ankylosis  is 
sound  and  bony,  will  increase  the  flexion.  The  position, 
therefore,  is  mechanically  a  weak  one  for  carrying  body 
weight.  Even  when  new  bone  is  forming,  its  complete 
consolidation  is  sometimes  a  slow  process,  and  if  the 
surgeon  places  such  a  knee  in  a  slightly  flexed  position 


POSITIONS   FOR  ANKYLOSIS 


the  degree  of  ultimate  flexion  is  often  much  greater  than 
he  would  wish.  The  advantage  of  increased  strength 
and  stability  ensured  by  an  extended  joint  will  generally 
outweigh  all  other  considerations. 


ANKLE 

Position. — The  foot  should  be  kept  at  a 
right  angle  with  the  leg,  so  that  the  sole 
impinges  on  the  ground  in  a  slightly  varus 
rather  than  a  valgus  position  (Fig.  n). 

'Reasons. — If  the  reader  will  recall  -the 
ankylosed  ankles  he  has  seen,  he  will  re- 
member that  most  of  them  were  in  a  val- 
goid  position.  A  varoid  position  conduces 
to  a  strong  type  of  foot ;  a  valgoid  (flat- 
foot)  to  a  weak  foot,  and  all  the  disability 
associated  with  erroneous  deflection  of 
body  weight. 


\^J«7" 

JOINTS  OF  THE  TARSUS  AND  METATARSUS    „.    ,,     .  . 

Fig.  11. — Anky- 

In  gunshot  wounds  and  other  injuries  '^  °ffoo?nkat 
of  the  tarsus  and  metatarsus,  the  deformi-  right  ansie  and 
ties  to  be  feared  correspond  to  the  common  ^rurpol'iti!^ 
static  deformity  of  flat  or  pronated  foot 
— a  subject  which  is  dealt  with  at  greater  length  in 
Chap.  III. — that  is  to  say,  to  pronation  at  the  mid- 
tarsal  joint,  flattening  of  the  longitudinal  arch,  and  some- 


Fig.  12.— Boot  with  bar 
behind  head  to  relieve  in- 
jured metatarsal  joints  and 
phalanges  from  pressure. 


Fig.  13. — A    and  »,  boot  with  straight    heel 

elongated  and  raised  i  in.  on  inner  border, 

with  small   patch  to  thicken  inner  side  of 

sole. 


times  flattening  of  the  transverse  arch  associated  with 
pain  in  the  metatarso-phalangeal  joints.  Callus  exuda- 
tion added  to  plantar  malposition  results  in  a  very 
crippled  foot.  In  all  gunshot  injuries  of  tarsus  and 


8    NOTES.  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

metatarsus  the  surgeon  should  take  care  during  the  later 
stages  of  healing  not  to  bandage  the  sole  rigidly  against  a 
flat  foot-piece,  for  if  that  be  done  every  irregularity  of 
bone  will  conduce  to  callosity  when  walking  is  resumed. 
It  is  necessary,  therefore,  at  this  stage  to  adjust  a  splint 
having  an  inside  arch  padded  to  conform  to  the  natural 
shape  of  the  foot.  Eversion  of  the  foot  should  be 
guarded  against,  and  the  hollow  of  the  arch  should, 
when  possible,  be  emphasized.  Later,  the  heel  of  the 
boot  should  be  raised  on  the  inner  side  to  obviate 
eversion,  and,  if  the  metatarsals  are  involved,  in  order 
to  allow  of  early  walking  a  bar  should  be  placed  across 
the  sole  of  the  boot  behind  the  tread  (Figs.  12,  13). 
Light  duty  can  then  be  undertaken  at  a  much  earlier 
date. 

FLAIL-JOINTS 

In  answer  to  the  question  "  What  should  be  done  with 
flail-joints  ?  "  I  would  say,  "  Secure  by  operation  an 
ankylosis  in  the  most  useful  position."  The  only 
exception  is  in  the  case  of  the  hip- joint,  where  by  means 
of  simple  mechanism  a  very  useful  limb  may  be  obtained 
in  spite  of  the  joint  being  flail. 


CHAPTER  II 

SUTURE  OF  NERVES,  AND  ALTERNATIVE 
METHODS  OF  TREATMENT  BY  TRANS- 
PLANTATION OF  TENDON 

THERE  are  few  problems  more  urgently  needing  solution 
at  the  present  time  than  those  involved  in  the  treatment 
of  limbs  disabled  by  injuries  involving  nerves.  The 
conditions  vary  and  are  often  very  complex.  The  nerve 
may  be  irretrievably  injured  beyond  all  hope  of  suture  ; 
it  may  be  entangled  in  cicatricial  tissue  ;  one  or  more 
of  the  muscles  it  supplies  may  have  suffered  grave 
lesions,  varying  from  partial  to  complete  destruction  ; 
the  tendons  or  muscles  themselves  may  be  bound  down 
by  adhesions,  or.  the  joint  or  joints  the  muscles  govern 
may  be  stiff,  ankylosed,  or  held  in  a  deformed  position 
by  a  skin  cicatrix ;  or  more  than  one  of  these  hamper- 
ing conditions  may  be  present.  The  simple  condition, 
where  the  nerve  or  some  of  its  fibres  receive  a  clean 
severance,  is  exceptional. 

If  once  these  facts  are  realized  it  will  require  no 
argument  to  establish  the  proposition  that  certain 
orthopaedic  problems  must  be  mastered  in  connection 
with  the  suture  of  nerves  if  proper  restoration  of 
motor  function  and  of  the  normal  efferent  and  afferent 
connection  between  muscle  and  the  central  nervous 
system  is  to  be  secured.  In  certain  fortunate  cases  the 
conductivity  of  the  nerve  is  restored  and  good  muscular 
function  may  result.  In  other  instances,  although  the 
conductivity  is  restored,  the  function  of  the  muscles 
and  joint  may  not  be  regained  because  certain  funda- 
mental principles  have  been  neglected.  There  are  other 
cases  in  which  the  conducting  power  of  the  nerve  is  not 
properly  restored,  and  yet  others  in  which,  owing  to 
extensive  destruction  of  the  nerve,  any  attempt  at  suture 
would  be  futile.  We  must,  therefore,  be  prepared  with 
alternative  methods  in  order  to  secure  for  the  patient 
a  satisfactory  limb. 

LATE  SUTURE  OF  NERVES 

With  regard,  however,  in  the  first  place,  to  late  suture 
of  the  nerve,  certain  general  principles  must  be  borne  in 
mind.  These  are  : 

9 


io  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

1.  The    correction    of    contractures    of    skin    or 
muscle  and  all  the  anatomical  constituents,  from 
skin  to  bone,  on  the  concave  aspect — that  is  to  say, 
on  the  side  of  the  abnormal  direction  the  contrac- 
ture  takes. 

2.  When  possible  the  freeing  of  joints  from  all 
adhesions  and  the  restoration  of  the  mobility  of  the 
joint  in  all  cases  where  ankylosis  is  threatened. 

3.  The  maintenance  of  the  paralysed  muscles  in 
a  position  of   relaxation  throughout  the  period   of 
recovery. 

4.  The  practice  of  massage  during  the  recovery, 
but  without  once  allowing  the  relaxed  muscles  to 
be  stretched. 

f  In  short,  the  principles  and  their~application  coincide 
with  those  I  have  so  often  emphasized  in  the  treatment  of 
poliomyelitis.1 

1.  Freeing   the    Muscles. — If    the    muscles    are  not 
freed  from  all  mechanical  obstructions  to  their  action, 
they  cannot  respond  to  stimuli  sent  to  them  through 
the  nerve,  and  therefore  cannot  in  their  turn  send  the 
answering  afferent  impulse  which  is  necessary  to  bring 
the  apparatus  into  proper  working  order.     It  is  essential 
to  dwell  on  this  point,  inasmuch  as  many  operations  are 
being  performed  while  the  muscles  and  joints  are  stiff. 
This  stiffness  is  not  due  to  the  nerve  injury,  but  to  the 
consequences  of  trauma  and  sepsis  affecting  the  muscles, 
tendons,  blood-vessels,  nerves,  and  ligaments  about  the 
joint.     When  we  realize  how  anaemic  an  unused  muscle 
becomes,  we  shall  not  delay  in  giving  help  to  prepare  it 
for  the  reception  of  nerve  impulses. 

2.  Mobility  of  Joint. — Where  the  joint  is  threatened 
with  ankylosis,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  restore 
its  function.     Operation  on  the  nerves  is   doomed  to 
failure  if  these  fundamental  principles  be  disregarded. 

3.  Relaxation  of  Muscles. — The  importance  of  keep- 
ing the  partially  paralysed  and  overstretched  muscles 
in   relaxation   during   treatment   has   been  so   forcibly 
brought   home  in  ordinary  civil   practice  in  the  treat- 
ment   of    residual    paralyses   after    poliomyelitis,    lead 
palsy,  injuries  of  the  brachial  plexus  and  of  isolated 
nerves,  that  it  should  be  scarcely  necessary  for  me  again 
to  call  attention  to  it.     Nevertheless,  visits  to  wards 
prove  that  this  elementary  orthopaedic  measure  is  too 
frequently  entirely  omitted  by  surgeons  who  have  per- 
formed suture  of  injured  nerves.     Thus  we  find   men 
who  have  had  the  musculo-spiral  sutured  allowed  to 

1  The  Annual  Oration,  Medical  Society,  May  18th,  1914,  on  "  Infantile 
Paralysis  :  its  Early  Treatment  and  the  Surgical  Means  for  the  Alleviation 
of  Deformities." 


LATE  SUTURE   OF   NERVES  n 

walk  about  with  the  hand  dangling  in  palmar  flexion 
instead  of  its  being  kept  continuously  in  dorsillexion  ! 
By  letting  the  hand  hang  in  palmar  flexion  the  muscles 
supplied  by  the  sutured  musculo-spiral,  which  can  only 
recover  if  kept  relaxed,  are  allowed  to  become  stretched. 
The  result  is  that  the  fingers  and  hand  do  not  regain, 
can  hardly  be  expected  to  regain,  full  normal  function. 
A  similar  grave  error  is  often  perpetrated  in  the  case 
of  the  external  popliteal  nerve,  with  the  same  dis- 
appointing result  in  the  foot.  Frequently  I  have 
noticed  that  the  foot  of  a  patient  whose  popliteal  nerve 
has  been  sutured  is  allowed  to  remain  in  an  equinus 
position  !  Sometimes,  indeed,  the  operation  is  even 
performed  while  the  tendo  Achillis  is  contracted.  Were 
it  not  so  frequently  happening  I  should  feel  ashamed  to 
refer  to  this  matter,  but  as  it  is  happening  I  again  urge 
surgeons  who  suture  nerves  to  insist  that  the  affected 
muscles  be  kept  in  complete  relaxation  until  power  re- 
turns. The  most  skilful  operation  performed  on  the 
most  suitable  case  will  prove  a  fiasco  unless  the  affected 
muscles  are  continuously  kept  relaxed  until  recovery 
takes  place. 

Not  only  will  it  be  found  in  some  cases  that  no  pro- 
vision is  made  for  the  muscle  to  be  in  the  most  favourable 
condition  to  respond  to  the  earliest  motor  impulses 
which  come  through  the  block  in  the  nerve,  but,  further, 
the  mechanical  condition  of  the  muscle  as  to  function 
seems  to  be  entirely  neglected,  and  suture  of  the  nerve 
is  performed  when  the  paralysed  muscle  or  the  joint  on 
which  it  acts  is  immobilized  by  cicatricial  adhesions, 
If  restoration  of  function  is  to  follow  nerve  suture,  the 
new  axis  cylinders  growing  through  a  cicatrix  must,  of 
course,  be  enabled  to  establish  some  sort  of  normal 
relation  as  to  function  with  the  end  organs  in  muscle. 
If  the  muscle  is  mechanically  disabled  from  making  any 
response,  it  is  absurd  to  hope  for  good  functional  result, 
even  though  the  physiological  processes  of  repair  of  the 
nerve  be  perfect.  I  desire  to  emphasize  again  the  funda- 
mental principle  of  procedure — namely,  that  the  restora- 
tion of  the  mobility  of  joint  and  muscle  must  precede 
the  operation  of  nerve  suture.  It  is  useless  to  attempt 
it  otherwise. 

4.  Voluntary  Use  and  Massage. — For  precisely  simi- 
lar reasons,  it  is  important  that  the  patient  should,  as 
soon  as  possible,  exercise  the  limb  in  normal  move- 
ments. In  the  case  of  the  lower  limb  this  usually 
means  the  application  of  some  apparatus  designed  to 
prevent  strain  on  the  recovering  muscles  while  the 
patient  is  permitted  a  moderately  free  physiological  use 
of  his  limb.  In  order  to  make  the  foregoing  observa- 
tions more  lucid  to  those  who  have  not  followed  my 


12  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

writings,  which  are  based  on  the  late  Mr.  H.  O.  Thomas's 
theory  of  "  muscle  lengthening,"  I  will  briefly  indicate 
their  tenor. 

It  is  well,  in  view  of  the  enormous  number  of  injuries 
to  nerves  occurring  in  this  war,  to  emphasize  the  fact 
that  principles  applicable  in  poliomyelitis  are  applicable 
here.  When  speaking,  some  years  ago,  of  the  results 
of  acute  poliomyelitis,  I  pointed  out  that,  though  the 
disease  might  permanently  destroy  motor  cells  in  the 


Fig.   14. — Showing  action  of  dorsiflexing  after  transplantation  of 
tendons.     Captain   Mc.Vl array's  case. 

anterior  horns  of  the  grey  matter,  so  rendering  for 
ever  useless  the  muscles  dependent  upon  them,  unless 
nerve  transplantation  might  at  some  later  date  come  to 
their  rescue,  yet  complete  destruction  was  fortunately 
the  rarer  condition.  The  clinical  evidence  afforded  by 
rapid  and  complete  recoveries  from  complete  paralysis 
and  the  very  many  partial  recoveries  proved  that  the 
motor  cells  concerned  had  suffered  from  temporary  injury 
and  had  not  been  destroyed.  Something  had  happened 
to  make  the  muscle  incapable  of  responding  to  motor 
stimulus.  Whether  this  was  to  be  attributed  to  the 


LATE  SUTURE  OF  NERVES     13 

absence  of  afferent  muscle-sense  stimulus,  as  seemed 
probable,  or  whether  it  was  due  to  some  other  cause,  it 
was  clinically  certain  that  the  nerve  cells  became  par- 
tially inactive,  not  extinct,  and  that  with  appropriate 
treatment  of  the  muscle  or  group  of  muscles  functional 
activity  could  be  reinstated.  When  a  muscle  governed 
by  a  live  cell,  or  rather  a  group  of  live  cells,  fails  to  act, 
the  disability  may  be  spoken  of  as  functional.  Of  this 
disability  the  great  outstanding  cause  is  overstretching 
of  muscle  fibres.  A  surgeon  must  recognize  the  difference 
between  a  truly  paralysed  muscle  and  a  muscle  which 
is  overstretched,  and  must  know  how  to  distinguish  the 
one  condition  from  the  other. 

The  first  essential  of  treatment  is  that  the  muscle  or 
muscular  groups  must  be  prevented  from  being  over- 
stretched. If  the  wrist  is,  for  instance,  allowed  to 
remain  flexed,  the  flexor  muscles  undergo  adaptive 


Fig.  15  illustrates  a  similar  result  in  another  of  Captain  McMtirray's 
cases. 

shortening,  and  the  extensors  become  overstretched  and 
consequently  placed  at  a  mechanical  disadvantage. 
This  point  is  well  illustrated  by  dropped  wrist  from  lead 
poisoning.  The  lesion  here  may  be  either  in  the  cord  or 
in  the  nerve  trunks  ;  in  either  case  the  muscles  cease  to 
be  controlled  by  their  nerve  centres,  and  the  patient  goes 
about  with  his  wrist  flexed  by  gravity,  and  the  extensor 
muscles  become  disabled  by  continuous  overstretching. 
As  the  condition  is  usually  bilateral,  an  interesting 
experiment  to  test  my  contention  may  be  made,  if  the 
case  be  of  some  weeks'  standing,  by  placing  one  of  the 
paralysed  wrists  on  a  splint  to  keep  the  hand  dorsi- 
flexed.  It  will  be  found  that  recovery  will  be  much  more 
rapid  on  the  side  on  which  the  extensors  are  relieved 
from  overstretching  than  on  the  other,  neglected  side. 
When  a  muscle  is  deprived  of  the  natural  motor  stimuli, 
its  condition  from  the  point  of  view  of  function  and 
nutrition  is  the  same  whether  the  absence  of  stimuli  be 
due  to  inactivity  of  the  central  nerve  cells  or  to  interrup- 
tion of  the  conducting  paths  along  the  peripheral  nerves. 


M     NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

Its  motor  function  is  suspended,  its  nutrition  suffers,  it 
becomes  anaemic,  and  it  may  easily  be  overstretched  by 
gravity,  by  the  unrestrained  action  of  the  opposing 
muscle,  or  by  these  two  forces  acting  in  combination. 
If  the  wrist  and  fingers  are  kept  in  extreme  dorsiflexion, 
the  extensor  muscles,  thus  relieved  of  strain,  undergo 
adaptive  shortening,  and  soon  begin  to  respond  to  the 
constant  stream  of  tonic  stimuli  sent  to  them  by  efferent 
impulses  ;  later  they  come  under  the  higher  control  of 
the  voluntary  centres. 

Another  cause  of  persistence  of  functional  disability 
is  an  unequal  degree  of  recovery  in  opposing  muscular 
groups. 

Deflection  of  Body  Weight. — A  most  potent  factor 
for  evil  is  what  I  have  called  the  erroneous  deflection 
of  body  weight,  which,  for  physical  reasons,  operates 
chiefly  in  the  lower  limbs.  If,  for  example,  there 
be  weakness  in  the  tibial  group  and  the  patient  be 
allowed  to  walk,  the  valgoid  deformity  will  constantly 
increase,  the  tibial  muscles  will  be  more  and  more 
stretched,  adaptive  contraction  will  affect  the  peronei, 
and  structural  alteration  will  ensue  in  the  tarsal  bone, 
terminating  in  a  troublesome  flat-foot.  All  these  un- 
toward results  may  be  avoided  by  simple  treatment  on 
sound  scientific  principles  ;  a  little  alteration  of  the  boot 
which,  by  raising  the  inside  of  the  heel  of  the  boot, 
will  deviate  pressure  from  the  inner  to  the  outer  side 
of  the  foot,  may  suffice.  When  we  have  to  deal  with 
a  group  of  muscles  in  which  the  power  is  only  slightly 
impaired,  the  muscular  balance  may  be  restored  by 
over-developing  the  weaker  group.  If,  for  instance, 
the  peronei  are  weak,  but  the  foot  can  quite  easily  be 
placed  in  the  everted  position,  then  massage  and  exer- 
cises may  reasonably  be  expected  to  succeed.  But  if 
the  foot  cannot  be  everted  because  of  adaptive  shorten- 
ing of  the  tibial  tendons,  then  massage  and  exercise  of 
the  peronei  will  be  perfectly  useless  until  such  time  as 
the  deformity  has  been  corrected  and  the  overstretched 
muscles  kept  relaxed  for  a  sufficient  period  to  permit 
them  to  recover  by  interstitial  shortening. 

LATE  RECOVERY  OF  MUSCLE  POWER 

Before  any  operations  are  performed  affecting  the 
mobility  of  a  joint,  every  use  should  be  made  of  available 
muscle  power.  No  surgeon  should  operate  on  these 
cases  until  he  has  fully  satisfied  himself  whether  or  no 
it  be  possible  to  restore  the  apparently  paralysed  muscle. 
Neglect  of  this  precaution  produces  such  a  distressing 
occurrence  as  the  unexpected  recovery  of  muscles  which 
were  ignored  because  assumed  to  be  paralysed.  For 


RECOVERY   OF   MUSCLE   POWER       15 

example,  a  patient  was  brought  to  me  once  with  a  par- 
tially ankylosed  knee.  The  operation  of  arthrodesis  had 
been  performed  with  a  view  of  bringing  about  bony 
ankylosis.  As  an  arthrodesis  the  operation  had  failed, 
for  the  knee  had  a  short  range  of  movement.  As  an 
experiment,  illustrating  the  principle  we  are  discussing, 
it  was  very  successful,  because  the  quadriceps  was  act- 
ing with  considerable  strength.  Prolonged  fixation  had 
relieved  the  quadriceps  from  all  strain,  and  restoration 
of  function  resulted.  This  case  exemplifies  'the  mistake 
of  taking  for  granted  that  a  muscle  is  paralysed  without 
first  making  quite  certain  that  it  is  really  paralysed. 
It  is  only  possible  to  make  quite  certain  by  relaxing 
the  muscle,  and  thus  putting  it  into  the  position  most 
favourable  to  recovery,  for  a  sufficient  length  of  time. 
Electrical  tests  cannot  be  relied  upon  to  give  this  infor- 
mation. 

Treatment  to  Promote  this. — The  first  stage  of 
treatment  is  the  correction  of  existing  deformity.  When 
deformity  has  been  corrected  the  limb  should  be  kept 
immovable  until  the  ligaments,  muscles,  and  even  bone 
have  become  of  normal  length  and  shape.  The  con- 
tinuity of  treatment  must  be  maintained  or  a  relapse  will 
result.  This  point  is  fundamental,  and  neglect  to  ob- 
serve it  spells  failure,  as  the  slightest  stretching  of  a 
muscle  on  the  point  of  recovery  disables  it  again.  All 
the  good  work  may  be  thwarted  by  a  single  indiscretion. 
I  cannot  emphasize  this  point  too  strongly.  For  instance, 
let  us  take  the  case  of  a  drop-wrist  which  has  been  placed 
in  a  splint  designed  to  dorsiflex  the  hand  at  the  wrist. 
The  position  must  be  constantly  maintained.  The  hand 
must  not  be  allowed  to  flex  for  a  single  moment  until 
recovery  has  occurred.  Even  while  the  patient  washes, 
the  hand  must  be  held  dorsiflexed. 

The  clinical  test  of  the  recoverability  of  a  muscle, 
therefore,  depends  on  an  experiment.  Let  it  be  kept  for 
a  prolonged  period — for  at  least  six  months — in  a 
position  of  relaxation.  This  test  should  always  be  made 
before  condemning  any  muscle,  no  matter  how  long  the 
period  for  which  it  may  apparently  have  been  paralysed. 
When,  therefore,  one  reads  in  textbooks  statements  to 
the  effect  that  we  are  to  despair  of  the  return  of  power 
after  a  certain  length  of  time,  we  can  quite  well  afford  to 
ignore  the  advice  unless  in  addition  to  this  time  test 
there  has  been  an  uninterrupted  muscular  relaxation 
during  that  time. 

These  are  views  which  I  have  without  ceasing  urged 
upon  my  professional  brethren  as  applicable  to  infantile 
paralysis.  They  are  equally  applicable,  with  certain 
modifications,  in  the  case  of  gunshot  injuries.  It  is 
obvious  that  in  infantile  paralysis  long  mechanical 


i6  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

treatment  can  do  no  harm.  This  is  not  so  in  the  case  of 
a  soldier  in  whom  a  nerve  has  been  injured.  If  suture  is 
to  give  any  promise  of  success  there  must  be  a  limit  to 
conservative  methods,  and  in  any  case  an  exploration 
of  the  nerve  is  a  harmless  procedure. 


TENDON  TRANSPLANTATION  IN  GUNSHOT  INJURIES 
OF  NERVES 

In  recommending  tendon  transplantation  in  gunshot 
injuries,  I  have  profited  by  the  experience  gained  in 
anterior  poliomyelitis.  I  have  frequently  performed 
tendon  transplantation  with  success  in  the  adult  in 
cases  in  which  isolated  nerves  have  been  destroyed. 


Fig.  16  A.—  Showing  the  ten- 
don which  is  to  be  trans- 
planted about  to  be  passed 
through  a  tunnel  in  the  acting 
tendon.  The  tunnel  is  being 
dilated  to  receive  the  trans- 
planted tendon. 


Fig.  16  B.— Trans- 
plant in  position. 
'I  he  angulation  is 
dealt  with  as  shown 
in  Fig.  16  c. 


Fig.  16  c.— In  order  to 
overcome  angulation  a 
slit  is  made  in  the  upper 
part  of  .the  receiving 
tendon,  which  is  then 
wrapped  r  o  u  nd  the 
transplanted  tendon. 


Similarly,  unrecorded  cases  have  been  operated  upon  by 
my  friends  Mr.  Thelwall  Thomas  and  Mr.  Bickersteth. 
At  the  Military  Orthopaedic  Hospital,  Liverpool,  my 
colleague,  Captain  McMurray,  has  at  the  moment  of 
writing  three  successful  cases  in  which  transplantation 
has  been  done  for  musculo-spiral  paralysis.  As  previously 
indicated,  the  object  of  a  transplantation  is  to  improve 
or  restore  muscular  balance.  It  is  not  justified  unless 
it  improves  function.  There  is  little  satisfaction  to  a 
patient  if  the  transplanted  muscle  merely  responds  to 
faradism,  or  even  makes  a  feeble  movement  by  the  effort 
of  the  will.  It  must  be,  or  give  the  promise  of  becoming, 
a  substitute  for  the  muscle  it  supplants,  and  it  can  only 
be  judged  by  its  ultimate  usefulness. 


TENDON  TRANSPLANTATION 


A  tendon  may  be  transplanted  in  order  to  restore  the 
balance  between  opposing  groups  of  muscles  by  helping 
a  redistribution  of  power,  or  its  attachment  may  be 
slightly  altered  to  prevent  deformity. 

Recognizing  that  the  principles  involved  in  tendon 


Fig.  17  A. — Tendons  about  to 

be*  pulled    through    another 

before  suturing. 


Fig.  17  B.— The  divided 

ends   of  three   tendons 

passed  through  another 

tendon  in  its  course. 


Fig.  18  A.  -Showing  transplanted 

tendon  about  to  be  passed  along 

a  tunnel  in  the  receiving  (active) 

tendon. 


Fig.  18  B.—  Tendon  passed  along 
course  of  active  tendon. 


transplantation  are  the  same  in  both  conditions,  I  will 
now  briefly  describe  certain  transplantation  operations 
I  recommend  for  various  injuries. 

As   a  preliminary  I  give  here  a  series  of  diagrams, 
Figs.  16,    17,    18,  19,   and   20,   illustrating   methods   of 

C 


i8  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

transplantation  of  tendon  into  tendon,  applicable  under 
various  anatomical  conditions. 

In  the  first  part  of  this  chapter  I  considered  some 
general  principles  which  should  guide  the  surgeon  in 
the  treatment  of  limbs  disabled  by  injuries  involving 
nerves.  I  pointed  out  the  importance  of  giving  the 
muscles  ample  time  and  opportunity  to  recover  by 
keeping  them  in  a  relaxed  position  for  a  sufficiently 
long  period,  and  I  began  the  discussion  of  tendon  trans- 
plantation as  an  alternative  method  of  treatment 
where  nerve  suture  was  not  possible.  I  now  propose  to 


Fig.  19. — Three  tendons  passed 
through  another  tendon,  which 
has  been  split  to  receive  them. 


fit.  20. — Tendons  inserted 

into  either   side    of  active 

tendon. 


consider  the  transplantation  operations  my  experience 
leads  me  to  recommend  in  various  injuries. 


UPPER  LIMB 
Irreparable  Injury  oj  Musculo-spiral  Nerve 

i.  In  cases  of  musculo-spiral  injury  the  deformity  is  a 
dropped  wrist,  with  loss  of  the  power  of  extending  the 
fingers.  The  uncontrolled  action  of  the  flexor  group 
causes  the  fingers  to  curl  into  the  palm,  and  the  hand  to 
become  useless. 

In  such  a  case  : 

(a)  The  flexor  carpi  radialis  and  the  flexor  carpi 
ulnaris  can  be  transplanted  into  the  paralysed 
extensor  of  thumb  and  fingers  ;  and 

(6)  in  addition  the  pronator  radii  teres  may  be 
affixed  to  the  two  radial  extensors. 

Transplantation  of    Pronator    Radii  Teres  and  the 
Radial  and  Ulnar  Flexors  in  Musculo-spiral  Paralysis. 

— I  would   recommend  for  this  condition  of  musculo- 


TENDON  TRANSPLANTATION  19 

spiral  paralysis  the  double  operation  (a)  and  (6),  and  I 
will  briefly  indicate  the  method  of  its  performance. 

With  the  forearm  midway  between  pronation  and 
supination,  an  incision  is  made  along  the  radial  border 
of  the  forearm  in  its  middle  third.  Under  cover  of  the 
tendon  of  the  supinator  longus  the  pronator  radii  teres 
will  be  found  where  it  becomes  inserted  into  the  outer 
border  of  the  radius.  From  this  it  is  detached,  and  is 
then  inserted  into  the  tendons  of  the  extensor  carpi 
radialis  longus  and  brevis,  which  lie  closely  applied  to  it 
on  the  dorsal  surface. 

i  A  horseshoe  incision,  with  the  convexity  resting  on 
the  back  of  the  carpus,  with  the  two  straight  sides  ex- 
tending along  the  radial  and  ulnar  borders,  is  now  made. 
Through  the  lateral  aspects  of  this  incision  the  tendons 
of  the  carpi  ulnaris  and  radialis  are  identified,  and  are 
detached  from  their  insertion  as  near  the  carpus  as 
possible. 

The  tendons  are  brought  round  the  ulna  and  radius 
respectively  in  very  slanting  fashion,  and  are  then 
attached  to  the  extensors  of  the  fingers  and  thumb,  the 
carpi  ulnaris  being  attached  to  the  tendons  of  the  three 
inner  fingers  and  the  flexor  carpi  radialis  to  those  of  the 
thumb  and  index  finger.  The  method  of  fixation  should 
be  neat  and  workmanlike. 


Injury  to  Median  and  Ulnar  Nerves 

In  the  case  of  great  damage  to  the  median  and  ulnar 
nerves,  operations  on  tendons  alternative  to  those  on  the 
nerves  will  be  very  rarely  required  as  compared  with 
those  on  the  external  popliteal  and  the  musculo-spiral, 
for  the  reason  that  by  means  of  flexion  of  the  elbow  a 
gap  of  two  or  three  inches  in  the  median  may  be  closed 
up  ;  by  flexing  the  elbow  and  displacing  the  ulnar  to  the 
front  a  similar  space  in  this  nerve  can  be  obliterated. 
End-to-end  suture,  therefore,  is  much  more  easily  secured 
in  these  two  nerves  than  in  the  case  of  the  musculo- 
spiral  and  external  popliteal. 

In  cases  of  complete  and  irreparable  paralysis  of  the 
muscles  supplied  by  the  median  nerve  the  only  active 
muscles  on  the  flexor  aspect  of  the  forearm  are  the  flexor 
carpi  ulnaris  and  the  inner  half  of  the  flexor  profundus 
digitorum. 

Transplantation  of  Tendons  in  Median  Paralysis. — 
(a)  The  outer  tendons  of  the  flexor  profundus  are  in- 
serted into  the  inner  tendons  of  the  same  muscle. 

(6)  The  tendons  of  the  flexor  sublimis  are  inserted 
into  the  tendon  of  the  flexor  carpi  ulnaris.  The  ex- 
tensor carpi  radialis  longior  is  attached  to  the  flexor 
longus  pollicis. 


20  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Method. — A  curved  incision  is  made  convex  down- 
wards with  the  apex  just  above  the  anterior  annular 
ligament  of  the  wrist.  After  retracting  the  flexor 
sublimis  tendons,  the  outer  two  tendons  of  the  flexor 
profundus  are  inserted  into  the  two  active  inner  tendons 
of  the  same  muscle.  The  flexor  ulnaris  is  then  divided 
close  to  its  insertion,  and  between  the  two  portions  of 
its  split  end  the  tendons  of  the  flexor  sublimis  to  the 
four  fingers  are  inserted.  The  tendon  of  the  extensor 
carpi  radialis  longior  is  now  found  at  the  outer  border 
of  the  incision,  and  after  division  is  inserted  into  the 
tendon  of  the  flexor  longus  pollicis  round  the  outer 
border  of  the  radius. 


Fig.  21. — Tendon  of  peroneus 

longus  divided   in   its    course, 

and    identified    at    the    outer 

border  of  the  foot. 


Fig.  22 — Tendon  of  peronens 

longus  drawn  out  through  the 

lower  incision. 


Transplantation  in  Complete  Paralysis  of  the  Ulnar 
Nerve. — The  twp  inner  tendons  of  the  flexor  profundus 
are  attached  to  the  two  outer. 

The  palmaris  longus  is  inserted  into  the  tendon  of  the 
flexor  carpi  ulnaris. 

After-treatment. — After  operations  for  musculo-spiral 
paralyses  the  hand  should  be  kept  dorsiflexed  until 
recovery  of  the  mus.de  is  complete.  When  the  grafted 
muscles'  are  acting  sufficiently  well  and  strongly  to  lift 
the  hand  and  fingers,  the  time  will  have  come  for  gra- 
dual training  in  co-ordination  and  balanced  movement. 
Even  after  the  patient  has  learnt  to  use  his  hand,  it  is 
still  necessary  that  he  should  continue  to  wear  a  dorsi- 
flexion  splint  at  night  to  prevent  contractures  of  the 
flexors  during  sleep. 


LOWER  LIMB 
Paralysis  of  Anterior  Crural  Nerve 

Transplant  the  sartorius  and  biceps  into  the  patella. 
An   alternative    measure  would   be   the   application 


TENDON  TRANSPLANTATION          21 

of  a  knee  cage  with  an  extension  spring  to  take  the 
place  of  the  paralysed  quadriceps.  This  should  be  worn 
permanently. 


Fig.  23.— Tendon  of  per- 
oneus  longus  about  to  be 
drawn  through  the  incision 
opposite  the  annular  liga- 
ment under  which  it  has  to 
pass. 


Fig.  24.— Tendon  of  per- 
oneus  longus  about  to  be 
drawn  under  the  annular 
ligament  to  be  inserted 
!in  the  tibia. 


Fig.  25. — Tendon  of  tibialis  anticus  being  drawn  taut,  the  foot  being  kept  at 

right  angles  ;  tendon  is  then  cut  and  passed  through  a  tunnel  in  the  tibia.    The 

tendon  of  the  peroneus  longus  is  shown  drawn  up  through  the  same  opening. 


22  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Paralysis  of  Muscles  supplied  by  External  Popliteal 

Nerve 

The  anterior  group  of  muscles  and  the  peronei  are 
paralysed.  The  deformity  is  a  dropped  foot  with 
varus  due  to  gravity  and  the  uncontrolled  action  of 
the  muscles  attached  to  the  tendo  Achillas  and  of  the 
tibialis  posticus. 

Tendon  Transplantation. — There  is  not  much  scope 
for  effective  tendon  transplantation  in  this  injury,  ex- 


Fig.  26. — Tendon  of  peroneus  longus  about  to  be  drawn  through  the  hole 
drilled  in  the  tibia. 

cept  in  cases  in  which  only  particular  branches  of  the 
nerve  have  been  picked  out.  For  instance,  an  injury 
paralysing  the  two  peronei  muscles,  but  leaving  the 
anterior  tibial  nerve  intact,  would  result  in  a  deformity 
consisting  chiefly  of  inversion  of  the  foot  at  the  mid- 
tarsal  joint — that  is,  pes  varus.  In  such  cases,  trans- 
plantation of  the  insertion  of  the  tibialis  anticus  into 
the  dorsum  of  the  cuboid  or  into  the  base  of  the  fifth 
metatarsal  replaces  the  loss  of  the  evertors  and  re- 
stores the  balance  of  the  foot. 

Tendon  Fixation. — In  cases  of  more  extensive  para- 
lysis there  is  not  sufficient  muscle  power  remaining  for 
it  to  be  effectually  distributed  ;  there  is,  so  to  say, 


TENDON  TRANSPLANTATION         23 


not  enough  power  to  go  round.  Tendon  fixation  is  then 
the  best  operative  procedure,  for  it  establishes  a  firm 
barrier  against  drop-foot,  and  yet  allows  useful  mobility. 
Tilanus  of  Holland  suggested  tendon  fixation  for  certain 
types  of  flail-foot  many  years  ago,  and  I  am  hoping 
that  it  will  prove  increasingly  useful  in  military  surgery. 
The  object  of  tendon  fixation  is  to  utilize  the  tendons 
of  completely  paralysed  muscles  as  accessory  ligaments 
to  hold  a  paralysed  foot  in  .a  correct  position.  This  can 
be  brought  about  in  an  endless  variety  of  ways,  and  will 


Fig.  27. — Tendon  of   peroneus 
longus  drawn  through  the  tibia. 


Fig.  28. — Tendon  of  peroneus 

longus  about  to  be  stitched  to 

the  periosteum  of  the  tibia. 


supply  the  ingenious  surgeon  with  many  interesting  and 
useful  problems  for  reflection.  Personally,  after  many 
successful  operations,  I  would  recommend  this  method 
of  treatment  to  meet  the  disabilities  of  paralysis  due  to 
injury  of  the  external  popliteal. 

Tendon  Fixation  in  Drop-foot  due  to  Injury  of  the 
External  Popliteal  Nerve. — Two  small  incisions  are 
made  along  the  course  of  the  peroneus  longus  tendon. 
The  first  is  placed  over  the  tendon,  just  before  it  turns 
round  the  outer  border  of  the  foot  on  to  the  sole,  and  the 
other  about  three  to  four  inches  above  the  tip  of  the 
external  malleolus  (Fig.  21). 


24  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


The  tendon  is  now  divided  through  this  upper  incision, 
and  the  lower  freed  portion  is  then  pulled  out  of  its  sheath 
through  the  lower  opening  while  its  normal  attachment 
to  the  sole  remains  undisturbed  (Fig.  22). 

An  incision  two  to  three  inches  above  the  tip  of  the 
external  malleolus  is  made  just  externally  to  the  anterior 
border  of  the  tibia,  and  the  divided  lower  portion  of  the 
peroneus  longus  tendon  is  passed  up  from  the  lower 
incision  to  this  new  one.  In  its  new  course  the  tendon 
should  pass  under  the  anterior  annular  ligament  (Figs. 


j  y 


Fig.  29.^Tendons  of  peroneus 
longus  and  tibialis  anticus  in- 
serted into  a  groove  made  on  the 


Fig.  30. — Lower  divided  portions 
of  the  tendons  of  the  peroneus 
longus  and  tibialis  anticus  inserted 
into  the  tibia.  The  upper  end  of 
the  tendon  of  the  tibialis  anticus 
sutured  to  the  lower  end  below  its 
insertion  in  the  bone. 


23  and  24),  but  if  this  cannot  be  done  it  may  be  passed 
in  the  deep  fascial  layer  (Fig.  32). 

The  periosteum  is  now  raised  from  the  anterior  aspect 
of  the  tibia  and  a  deep  groove  is  made  in  the  bone  ;  the 
tightly  pulled  tendon,  whose  outer  surface  has  previously 
been  roughened,  is  then  laid  in  the  groove  and  is  retained 
in  it  by  a  small  nail  or  it  is  fixed  by  strong  catgut  into 
fascia.  The  periosteum  is  then  replaced  over  it  (Figs. 
29  and  30). 

Another  effective  method  of  fixing  the  tendon  is  to 


TENDON   TRANSPLANTATION 


bore  a  hole  through  the  anterior  border  of  the  tibia  and 
pull  the  tendon  through  (Figs.  26,  27,  28).  The  free  end 
can  then  be  stitched  to  periosteum  on  the  inner  side  of 
the  tibia,  or  in  some  cases  it  may  be  more  convenient  to 
turn  the  tendon  over  the  crest  of  the  tibia  and  stitch  it 
to  the  tendon  before  it  enters  the  tunnel.  Through  this 
same  incision  the  tendon  of  the  tibialis  anticus  (Fig.  25) 
is  divided  and  the  upper  end  of  the  lower  portion  in- 
serted beneath  the  periosteum  in  front  of  the  tibia,  in 
a  manner  similar  to  that  first  de- 
scribed, by  nailing,  or  through  a 
hole  bored  in  the  substance  of  the 
bone,  after  the  second  method. 

When  this  has  been  done,  the  cut 
end  of  the  upper  part  of  the  tibialis 
anticus  tendon  is  inserted  into  the 
lower  part  of  the  tendon  distal  to 
its  insertion  into  the  tibia  (Fig.  30). 

The  peroneus  brevis  tendon  may 
then  be  shortened  and  inserted  into 
a  gutter  along  the  anterior  surface 
of  the  external  malleolus,  by  another 
short  nail. 

Another  simple  device  consists  in 
fixing  the  boot  at  right  angles  by 
means  of  a  leather  tongue  which  is 
fixed  to  the  toe-cap,  and  a  leather 
strap  round  the  upper  part  of  the 
boot  just  above  the  ankle  (Figs.  33  B 
and  33  c). 

Injury  to  Sciatic  Trunk 

If  the  whole  sciatic  nerve  has 
been  divided  high  up  in  the  thigh 
there  is  total  loss  of  power  below 
the  knee  and  in  certain  muscles 
governing  the  knee-joint.  In  such 
cases  the  patient  can  walk  quite 
well  in  a  jointed  calliper  splint  with 
a  filling  inside  the  boot  to  keep  the 
foot  at  right  angles.  Another  use- 
ful plan  is  to  fit  a  jointed  knee 
cage  (Figs.  96  and  97)  with  a  spring 
and  a  right-angled  support  for  the  ankle.  This  really 
means  that  we  make  the  paralysed  distal  part  of  the 
leg  into  a  species  of  artificial  limb,  and  this,  in  actual 
practice,  has  proved  much  better  than  any  artificial 
limb  that  I  have  ever  met  with. 

The  idea  of  rushing  to  amputation  of  a  limb  merely 
because  the   sciatic   nerve  is  destroyed,    and   therefore 


Fig.  31. —  Diagram  to 
show  the  anatomy  of  the 
area  concerned ;  the 
three  parts  of  the  annu- 
lar ligament  are  shown, 
the  tendon  of  the  tibialis 
anticus  is  hooked  in- 
wards, the  tendon  of  the 
peroneus  longus  has  been 
passed  under  the  annular 
ligament  and  brought  into 
contact  with  the  tibia. 


*6    NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


theoretically  the  nutrition  of  the  foot  must  go  wrong,  is 
too  horrible  to  be  contemplated.  Actual  experience  has 
proved  that,  in  many  cases,  the  errors  of  nutrition  which 
ought  in  theory  to  occur  do  not  occur,  or,  at  worst,  are 
not  nearly  so  serious  as  might  be  expected. 

CONCLUSION 

Surgeons  will  glean  from  what  has  been  written  that 
there  are  many  ways  in  which  the  disabilities  following 
nerve  destruction  can  be  met,  and  that  hardly  any  case 


Fit!.  32. — Alternative  operation. in  which  the  tendon  of  the  peroneus  longus  it 

pulled  through  the  subcutaneous  tissue  without  tegard  to  the  annular  ligament. 

A,  First  stage.     B,  Tendon  of  peroneus  longus  drawn  upwards  and  inwards. 

is  bad  enough  to  justify  a  counsel  of  despair.  Our  know- 
ledge of  what  can  be  done  in  poliomyelitis  will  invite 
us  to  take  a  cheerful  outlook  in  traumatic  paralyses. 

My  intention  in  this  chapter  has  been  not  merely  to 
indicate  ways  in  which  the  ground  can  be  prepared  for 
the  operations  of  nerve  suturing,  or  to  point  out  the 
value  of  keeping  a  paralysed  muscle  relaxed  by  opposing 
the  force  of  gravitation,  but  to  indicate  the  great  and 
ever-increasing  field  of  usefulness  that  is  opened  up  by 
utilizing  tendon,  whether  that  of  an  active  or  a  hopelessly 
paralysed  muscle,  for  the  restoration  of  movement  or 
the  correction  of  deformity,  thereby  restoring  to  a  greater 
or  less  extent  the  economic  efficiency  of  an  individual 
who  would  otherwise  sink  into  the  position  of  a  non-pro- 
ductive and  dependent  member  of  the  community. 


CHAPTER  III 

THE   SOLDIER'S   FOOT,  AND   THE   TREAT- 
MENT OF   COMMON    DEFORMITIES   OF 
THE   FOOT 

THE  foot  must  be  regarded  for  our  present  purpose  as 
consisting  of  two  parts  :  the  hinder  part,  behind  the 
mid-tarsal  joint,  formed  by  the  os  calcis  and  astragalus  ; 
and  the  fore  part,  in  front  of  that  joint,  consisting  of  the 
rest  of  the  tarsus,  the  metatarsus,  and  the  toes. 

The  Three  Arches  of  the  Foot.— The  hinder  part 
of  the  foot  is  designed  to  carry  the  body  weight  when 
standing.  The  os  calcis  and  astragalus  are  strongly 
bound  together  by  ligaments,  and  the  astragalus  is 
securely  set  between  the  two  malleoli  at  the  ankle-joint. 

The  fore  part  of  the  foot  is  much  more  mobile,  and  is 
designed  to  give  spring  to  the  foot  when  walking.  This 
spring  depends  on  the  efficiency  of  the  small  muscles  of 
'the  foot,  on  the  integrity  of  the  longitudinal  and  trans- 
verse arches,  and  on  the  freedom  of  movement  of  the 
toes  themselves. 

Regarded  as  a  base  of  support,  the  foot  is  a  tripod 
resting  on  the  heel,  the  head  of  the  first  metatarsal  bone, 
and  the  heads  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  metatarsal  bones. 
Each  side  of  the  triangle  formed  by  these  three  points  is 
arched.  The  outer  side,  formed  by  the  os  calcis,  cuboid, 
and  the  fourth  and  fifth  metatarsal  bones,  is  so  slightly 
arched  that  practically  the  whole  length  of  it  rests  on 
the  ground  when  standing.  This  element  of  the  foot  is 
therefore  not  very  susceptible  of  strain,  and  need  con- 
cern us  no  more. 

The  inner  side  is  strongly  arched  ;  the  arch  runs 
from  the  heel  upwards  and  forwards  to  the  neck  of 
the  astragalus,  then  downwards,  forwards,  and  inwards 
through  the  scaphoid,  internal  cuneiform,  and  first 
metatarsal  bones,  to  the  ball  of  the  great  toe.  This 
arch,  which  varies  in  height  in  different  individuals,  is 
composed  of  a  number  of  bones,  is  very  susceptible  to 
strain,  and  is  in  consequence  the  seat  of  a  number  of 
disabilities  which  we  shall  group  together  as  "  flat-foot." 

The  third  side  of  the  triangle  runs  from  the  head  of  the 
27 


28    NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

first  metatarsal  bone  to  the  heads  of  the  fourth  and  fifth 
metatarsal  bones,  and  forms  the  front  part  of  the  trans- 
verse arch  of  the  foot.  It  must  be  remembered  that  this 
transverse  arch  extends  backwards  throughout  the  whole 
of  the  fore  part  of  the  foot.  The  cuneiform  bones  and 
cuboid  bones  are  arranged  in  a  transverse  arch  as  well  as 
the  metatarsal  bones. 

Deformities  and  Disabilities  of  the  Foot. — In  con- 
sidering deformities  and  disabilities  of  the  foot,  due 
value  must  be  given  to  its  various  mechanical  elements 
— that  is  to  say,  not  only  to  its  bony  structure  but  also 
to  the  muscles  and  ligaments -which  help  to  maintain 
its  shape. 

Looked  at  in  this  way,  we  find  among  the  deformities 
and  disabilities  of  the  toes  such  conditions  as  hallux 
rigidus,  hallux  valgus,  and  hammer-toe,  and  we  note  that 
the  two  former  in  particular  are  frequently  associated 
with  some  degree  of  flat-foot. 

Impairment  of  the  transverse  arch  is  specially  apt  to 
be  associated  with  the  painful  condition  known  as 
metatarsalgia. 

Impairments  of  the  longitudinal  arch  are  associated 
with  a  train  of  symptoms  which  are  found  in  the  various 
degrees  of  weak  foot,  everted  foot,  and  flat-foot. 

All  these  types  of  derangement  of  the  mechanical 
elements  of  the  foot  and  the  resulting  disabilities  depend 
on  strains  about  the  complicated  series  of  joints  in  the 
fore  part  of  the  foot. 

In  the  hind  part  of  the  foot  the  disabilities  are  fewer. 
They  are  mainly  connected  with  painful  conditions  of 
t.ie  heel,  due  to  such  conditions  as  strain  of  the  insertion 
of  the  tendo  Achillis,  or  periostitis  of  the  os  calcis,  due 
to  trauma  or  sepsis. 

When  a  clear  idea  of  these  several  disabilities  and  of 
the  measures  suitable  for  the  prevention  and  treatment  of 
each  has  been  obtained,  it  will  be  more  easy  to  grasp 
and  understand  the  various  disabilities  of  the  foot  to 
which  the  soldier  is  liable,  always  remembering  that 
two  or  more  types  often  occur  simultaneously,  and  that 
all  must  be  appropriately  treated. 

FLAT-FOOT 

f  The  term  flat-foot  may  be  taken  as  a  generic  term  to 
include  all  degrees  of  strain  of  the  longitudinal  arch  of 
the  foot.  To  these  various  conditions  different  names 
have  been  given,  which  need  not  detain  us  here.  The 
point  to  be  understood  is  that  all  degrees  occur,  from 
slight  strain  of  the  ligaments  and  tendons  by  which  the 
arch  is  maintained,  to  complete  descent  of  the  arch  with 
osseous  deformity,  obvious  to  the  most  casual  observer. 


FLAT-FOOT  29 

The  essential  fact  in  the  deformity  is  abduction  and 
eversion  of  the  fore  part  of  the  foot  (Fig.  33  A).  If  it 
commences  as  a  sudden  acute  condition,  it  is  associated 
with  strain  of  the  inferior  calcaneo-scaphoid  ligament ; 
to  this  is  due  the  tenderness  elicited  on  pressure  on  this 
ligament  just  below  the  tubercle  of  the  scaphoid.  This 
tenderness  is  characteristic.  Pain  in  this  situation  is 
often  most  acute  in  patients  who  have  naturally  a  very 
high  arch.  When  such  an  arch  begins  to  give  way  the 
strain  on  the  "  spring  "  ligament  is  great  and  the  pain 
correspondingly  severe,  but  the  foot  is  not  physically 
flat,  for  the  arch  may  still  be  higher  than  is  normal  in 
most  people. 

As  the  foot  becomes  more  strained  under  continued 
exercise,  the  bones  of  the  tarsus  begin  to  descend  and 
pain  is  complained  of  across  the  dorsum  of  the  foot. 


Fig.  33  A.— Flatleverted  foot. 

Finally,  when  the  deformity  becomes  still  greater, 
there  may  be  pain  on  the  outer  side  of  the  os  calcis 
below  the  tip  of  the  external  malleolus.  This  is  probably 
to  be  attributed  to  bruising  of  the  periosteum  due  to  the 
os  calcis  impinging  on  the  malleolus  ;  in  some  cases  an 
adventitious  bursa  is  ultimately  produced  in  this  situa- 
tion. 

ACUTE  FLAT-FOOT 

All  the  above  symptoms,  and  also  actual  descent  of  the 
arch  with  pronounced  abduction  and  eversion  of  the 
foot  at  the  mid-tarsal  joint,  may  come  on  with  great 
rapidity,  and  then  be  associated  with  very  severe  pain, 
so  that  the  patient  cannot  walk,  and  can  hardly  bear  to 
have  the  foot  touched.  Such  a  condition  may  fairly  be 
described  as  acute  flat-foot.  It  occurs  in  its  typical 
form  in  people  who  are  in  poor  physical  condition,  as,  for 
instance,  after  an  attack  of  influenza,  and  return  too 
soon  to  work  which  involves  much  standing  and  lifting 
of  weights — for  example,  hospital  nurses.  It  occurs  in 
exactly  the  same  way  in  the  recruit.  Take,  for  example, 
the  clerk  who  has  taken  little  exercise  and  who  has  been 


30  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

in  the  habit  of  wearing  boots  in  which  there  is  no  room 
for  movement  of  the  toes  and  bones  of  the  fore  part  of 
the  foot  :  all  the  muscles  and  ligaments  controlling 
and  supporting  the  arches  of  the  foot  are  weak  and  out 
of  condition  from  want  of  use  ;  under  the  strain  of  hard 
drill  they  give  way. 

Treatment  of  Acute  Flat-foot — The  treatment  of 
such  a  case  falls  into  three  stages. 

First  Stage. — If  the  foot  is  acutely  painful  the  patient 


Fig.  33  B. — 1.  Bootlace  to  pass  down — over  "  drop-foot  tongue,"  through 

eyelet  holes  therein,  and  then  back  into  higher  boot  eyelet  holes.    2.  For 

boot  without  toe-cap,  the  drop-foot  tongue  must  go  to  tip  of  toe. 

should  be  put  to  bed  and  the  feet  gently  massaged  for 
two  or  three  days  till  the  acute  tenderness  passes  off. 
During  this  time  he  must  never  be  allowed  to  set  foot  to 
the  ground,  for  the  weight  of  the  body  would  again 
strain  the  ligaments. 

Second  Stage. — As  soon  as  the  acute  tenderness  has 
passed  off,  the  foot  should  be  abducted  and  inverted 
so  as  completely  to  restore  the  arch,  and  kept  con- 
tinuously in  this  position  to  allow  stretched  ligaments 
to  shorten  and  become  adapted  to  the  correct  position. 
Mere  rest  in  bed  is  not  enough,  for  then  nothing  is  done 
to  restore  the  proper  shape  of  the  arches,  adaptation 


ACUTE   FLAT-FOOT  31 

takes  place  in  the  flat-foot  position,  and  the  patient  is 
left  with  a  real  flat-foot.  It  is  often  best  to  mould  the 
foot  into  correct  position  and  fix  it  in  plaster-of- Paris 
for  about  ten  days  to  allow  the  strained  ligaments  to 
recover  completely. 

Third  Stage. — When  the  plaster  is  removed,  after,  say, 
ten  days,  the  patient's  foot  is  exercised — first  of  all  by 
massage  and  exercise,  particularly  movements  of  the  toes 
and  inversion  movements,  never  eversion  movements. 
These  inversion  movements  are  intended  to  strengthen 
the  muscles  controlling  the  arch. 

Boots. — The  patient  is  allowed  up  in  specially  altered 
boots.  The  boots  should  grip  comfortably  round  the  ankle 


Fig.  33  c. — Side  view  of  boot  with  drop- foot  tongue  attached. 

and  heel,  but  the  whole  fore  part  of  the  boot  should  be 
roomy  to  allow  free  play  of  the  small  muscles  of  the  foot. 

Pointed  toes  are  very  harmful,  as  they  abduct  the 
fore  part  of  the  foot  and  help  to  produce  the  condition 
of  flat-foot.  The  inner  side  of  the  boot  should  be  straight, 
so  that  when  the  two  boots  are  placed  side  by  side  the 
inner  sides  are  parallel  right  forward  to  the  great  toe. 
This  is  not  the  conventional  boot  of  the  shoemaker,  but 
it  is  the  correct  boot  for  a  strong  foot. 

The  present  Army  boot  is  not  perfect,  but  it  is  much 
better  than  it  was  some  years  ago. 

Boots  of  suitable  shape  having  seen  secured,  they 
should  be  sent  to  the  shoemaker  to  have  the  heels 
"  crooked  "  on  the  inner  side.  By  this  is  meant  that 
the  heel  of  the  boot  is  made  J  in.  higher  on  the  inner 
side,  and  tapering  gradually  to  its  outer  side,  so  that 


32  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

the  inner  side  of  the  heel  is  J  in.  higher  than  the  outer 
side.  In  addition,  the  length  of  the  heel  should  be 
extended  forwards  by  J  in.  on  the  inner  side,  and  the 
sole  should  be  raised  J  in.  by  a  patch  on  the  inner  side 
of  the  sole  just  below  the  toe-joint  (Fig.  133). 

The  patient  must  never  put  foot  to  the  ground  without 
an  altered  boot  or  shoe  on,  otherwise  he  will  unwittingly- 
let  his  arch  descend  and  so  inflict  a  fresh  strain  on  the 
ligaments. 

The  man  should  then  be  instructed  to  walk  with  feet 
parallel,  not  with  the  toes  turned  out.  The  altered  heel 
helps  him  to  keep  his  toes  turned  in.  Exercises  should 
be  graduated  till  he  is  fit  for  full  duty. 

A  bad  case  of  acute  flat-foot  should  be  fit  for  light  duty 
in  three  weeks,  and  for  full  duty  with  the  heels  of  his 
boots  raised  on  the  inner  side  in  six  weeks  to  two  months. 

It  is  really  a  question  whether  the  Army  authorities 
ought  not  to  issue  all  boots  with  heels  raised  on  the 
inner  side,  as  this  is  a  great  relief  to  the  foot  on  a  long 
march  and  increases  the  man's  weight-carrying  and 
lasting  power. 

Certainly  all  recruits  with  weak  feet  should  be  started 
off  with  crooked  heels  on  the  boots  until  the  muscles  of 
their  feet  get  into  training.  They  should  also  be  taught 
to  walk  with  their  feet  parallel.  If  this  were  done  the 
feet  would  grow  stronger  rather  than  weaker,  and  con- 
siderably fewer  men  would  require  to  be  taken  off  duty. 

TRAUMATIC  FLAT-FOOT 

Flat-foot  in  every  respect  similar  to  that  just  described 
as  acute  flat-foot  may  arise  from  injury — for  example, 
when  the  wheel  of  a  trap  runs  over  a  man's  foot  and 
strains  all  the  ligaments. 

FLAT-FOOT  FROM  PERIARTHRITIS 

Similar  mechanical  conditions  arise  in  gonorrhceal 
periarthritis  when  all  the  ligaments  are  sodden  with 
exudate,  become  soft,  and  stretch.  The  same  is  true 
when  the  infection  is  of  an  ordinary  septic  character,  for 
if  the  man  puts  weight  on  his  foot  before  the  arch  is 
restored  to  its  strength  he  will  get  a  flat  foot.  He  can, 
however,  walk  with  safety  in  a  boot  with  the  heel  well 
crooked  almost  as  soon  as  the  disappearance  of  pain 
allows  him  to  put  his  foot  to  the  ground. 

RIGID  FLAT-FOOT 

These  cases  lead  us  naturally  to  the  rigid  form  of  flat- 
foot  which  results  from  neglect  in  the  acuter  stages, 
whether  the  cause  of  the  sudden  yielding  of  the  ligaments 


RIGID   FLAT-FOOT 


33 


be  overstrain  due  to  unaccustomed  exertion  in  walking, 
to  injury,  or  to  weakening  of  the  ligaments  by  the  pro- 
ducts of  infective  agents. 

The  foot,  therefore,  should  be  maintained  in  the 
inverted  and  adducted  position  during  recovery  from 
the  acuter  conditions,  and  when  the  patient  begins  to 


FU.  34  A.— Flat-foot,  first  stage  :  Thomas's  wrench  applied  to  invert. 


Fig.  34  B. — Flat-foot,  second  stage  :  Thomas's  'wrench  applied  to  adduct  foot 
at  midtarsa!  joints. 

walk  the  body  weight  should  be  deviated  from  the 
inner  to  the  outer  side  (Fig.  136).  If  this  important 
routine  should  be  neglected  the  recovery  of  ligaments 
will  occur  in  a  flat-footed  position  with  stiffness  in  all 
the  joints.  The  patient  in  that  case  cannot  stand  on  the 
outer  edge  of  the  foot  or  turn  it  into  an  arched  shape. 

Treatment   is   very  simple,  but  must   be  thorough. 

The  foot  should  be  wrenched  so  as  to  break  down  all 

adhesions  and  make  it  thoroughly  pliable  (Figs.  34  A, 

34  B).    The  foot  is  by  this  means  converted  into  an  acute 

D 


34  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


traumatic  flat-foot,  and  it  must  undergo  the  course  of 
treatment  described  elsewhere  for  that  condition.  It 
should  be  moulded  into  the  correct  position,  and  plaster- 
of-Paris  applied.  After  two  or  three  weeks  of  such  rest, 
to  allow  recovery  from  the  trauma,  graduated  exercise 
may  be  taken  in  boots  so  altered  as  to  deviate  body 
weight  from  the  inner  to  the  outer  side  of  tarsus.  An 
outside  iron  is  often  found  a  great  assistance  in  main- 
taining the  correct  position  of  the  foot 
V  /  during  walking  (Fig.  35). 


OSSEOUS  FLAT-FOOT 

A  real  stiff  flat-foot  which  has  been 
neglected  for  years  becomes  an  "  osseous 
flat-foot  "  —  that  is  to  say,  changes  occur 
in  the  shapes  of  the  bones  to  adapt 
them  to  the  erroneous  position.  Though 
something  can  be  done  to'improve  such 
cases,  they  cannot  always  be  made  fit 
to  be  soldiers  ;  the  surgeon  must,  how- 
ever, be  sure  that  he  is  dealing  with  real 
osseous  change  and  not  merely  with  a 
flat-foot  which  is  rigid  owing  to  liga- 
mentous  contractures  and  adhesions. 


I 


Fig.  35.— 9utside 
iron  in  addition  to 
crooked  long  heel 
and  piece  to  sole. 


FLAT-FOOT  DUE  TO  SPASM  OF  THE 
PERONEI 

I  described  this  condition  (Fig.  36) 
many  years  ago,  and  stated  that  it  was 
by  no  means  uncommon.  It  may  be 
found  in  any  out-patient  department  if 
looked  for,  and  I  have  operated  upon 
as  many  as  150  cases  in  one  year.  It 
occurs  usually  after  puberty  and  also  in 
early  adolescence  ;  it  is  common  among 
the  robust,  not  only  among  the  weakly, 
and  is  not  associated  with  the  temperament  that  is 
known  as  neurotic.  I  will  describe  a  typical  case. 
A  young  man  of  18  limps  with  a  springless  gait  into 
the  out-patient  room.  He  walks  with  feet  practically 
rigid  and  with  toes  pointing  out.  They  are  both 
everted,  and  the  inner  border  over  the  region  of  the 
scaphoid  appears  thickened  and  even  angular.  Both 
the  character  of  the  walk  and  the  appearance  of  the  feet 
might  lead  to  the  diagnosis  that  osseous  changes  were 
advanced.  On  being  questioned  the  patient  may  give 
a  history  of  injury  such  as  a  fall  on  the  feet  ;  usually 
he  cannot  account  for  the  origin  of  his  trouble.  The 
pain  is  often  acute,  the  feet  may  perspire  abnormally, 


FLAT-FOOT 


35 


and  the  patient  may  not  be  able  to  walk  more  than  a 
short  distance.  Relief  is  experienced  on  removal  of 
his  boots ;  if  he  is  asked  to  invert  his  foot  he  cannot 
do  so,  and  when  .he  attempts  it  the  peronei  become 
rigid.  The  surgeon  when  he  examines  the  foot  manually 
finds  there  is  pain  on  pressure  over  the  deltoid  ligament, 
over  the  scaphoid,  and  over  the  tip  of  the  external 
malleolus  where  it  impinges  upon  the  os  calcis,  and 
tenderness  over  the  peronei  along  the  outer  border  of 
the  foot.  If  the  surgeon  gently  attempts  to  invert  the 
ankle  much  pain  is  experienced,  and  the  peronei,  so  to 
speak,  immediately  place  themselves  on  guard  and 
strongly  resist  his  efforts.  Now,  while  he  has  firm  hold 
of  the  foot,  let  him  engage  the  patient  in  conversation, 
at  the  same  time  gently  pressing  in  the  direction  of  in- 
version. Then  at  the  psychological  moment,  while  the 


Fig.  36.— Peroneal 
spasm  producing  a 
flat  everted  foot. 


Fig.  37. — Exposure  of  ten- 
dons of  peronei  preparatory 
to  exsection  of  about  J  in. 


peronei  are  quiescent,  very  suddenly  and  very  forcibly 
let  the  foot  be  inverted  and  held  there.  It  is  a  very 
painful  movement,  but  the  character  and  contour  of 
the  foot  are  completely  changed.  It  is  no  longer  rigid, 
osseous  changes  are  obviously  absent,  and  the  general 
appearance  of  the  foot  is  almost  normal.  The  moment 
the  surgeon  releases  his  hold,  the  old  rigidity  and  de- 
formity return. 

For  this  condition  mechanical  measures  are  of  no  avail. 
The  patient  must  be  anaesthetized  to  relax  all  spasm,  and 
about  f  in.  of  each  peroneus  should  be  removed  about 
i^  in.  above  the  malleolus  (Fig.  37).  The  foot  must  then 
be  fixed  for  about  three  weeks,  well  inverted  and  ad- 
ducted  at  the  mid-tarsal  joint,  and  later  the  ordinary 
treatment  for  flat-foot  began.  My  old  house-surgeon,  Mr. 
Naughten  Dunn,  secured  equally  good  results  by  pinch- 
ing with  a  pair  of  forceps  the  nerve  as  it  enters  to  supply 
the  peronei.  Simple  tenotomy  of  the  peronei  is  not 
sufficiently  drastic  to  prevent  recurrence  of  deformity. 


36  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


DIAGNOSIS 

It  is  not  an  easy  matter  to  lay  down  rules  for  a 
hard  and  fast  differential  diagnosis  between  these 
types  of  rigid  feet,  but  the  following  considerations 
will  help. 

An  osseous  flat-foot  which  has  become  adapted  to  its 
new  position  is  usually  strong  and  painless. 

A  flat-foot  rigid  from  adhesions  and  shortened  liga- 
ments is  still  susceptible  to  strain,  and  is  liable  to  become 
painful  after  unusual  exercise. 

The  type  due  to  a  spasmodic  contraction  of  the 
peronei  is  characterized  by  pain,  and  the  spasm  may  be 
overcome  in  the  manner  I  have  just  indicated. 

In  the  two  last  varieties,  after  the  deformity  has  been 
over-corrected  for  a  time,  energetic  massage  and  a 
correct  deviation  of  body  weight  are  essential  elements 
in  bringing  about  a  cure.  The  osseous  type,  once  the 
bones  have  completely  dropped,  may  not  only  be  painless 
but  may  be  strong  enough  to  bear  the  strain  of  long 
marches.  Wounded  soldiers  may  constantly  be  met 
with  whose  feet  are  very  flat,  whose  mid-tarsal  joints  are 
fixed,  but  who  have  undergone  several  months  of  hard 
training  without  a  complaint.  If  in  addition  to  these 
osseous  changes  the  power  of  inversion  of  the  foot  is 
lost  or  the  peronei  are  in  spasm,  surgical  attention  is 
urgently  called  for. 

The  flat-foot,  for  clinical  purposes,  may  be  divided 
into  two  classes : 

(a)  The  foot  which  the  patient  can  invert. 

(b)  The  foot  which  he  cannot  invert. 

The  second  class  will  not  respond  to  any  mechanical 
treatment,  such  as  a  plate  or  alteration  of  the  boot.  It 
will  not  even  suffer  correction  by  means  of  a  bandage  to 
an  outside  iron  from  knee  to  heel.  An  operation,  or 
forcible  manipulation  and  fixation  under  an  anaesthetic, 
are  essential  preliminaries  to  the  simpler  mechanical 
methods. 

The  first  class  will  never  require  an  operation. 

This  simple  clinical  division  should  be  helpful  to  the 
military  surgeon. 

SUBACUTE  FLAT-FOOT  (ORDINARY  FLAT-FOOT) 

The  stage  of  flat-foot  most  commonly  seen  is  neither 
an  acutely  painful  foot  too  tender  to  be  handled,  nor  a 
rigid  flat-foot,  but  an  intermediate  stage,  which  may  be 
called  subacute. 

The  patient's  feet  give  him  little  trouble  in  ordinary 
life,  but  a  long  walk  makes  them  ache  round  the  instep. 


FLAT-FOOT  37 

When  he  goes  to  bed  after  a  hard  day's  exercise  his  feet 
are  apt  to  get  stiff.  Next  morning  they  are  stiff  and 
painful  when  he  gets  up,  but  as  he  moves  about  this 
passes  off.  Later  in  the  day,  especially  if  he  has  to  do 
a  lot  of  standing  and  walking,  the  feet  again  become 
very  painful. 

Diagnosis. — This  is  made  by  considering  the  patient's 
history  and  by  finding  distinct  tenderness  on  pressure 
below  the  tuberosity  of  the  scaphoid  ;  there  may  or  may 
not  be  pain  in  other  localities.  Finally,  the  patient  can 
voluntarily  stand  on  the  outer  edge  of  his  foot  and  can 
crook  his  foot  into  the  arched  position.  This  last  point  is 
very  important,  for  it  means  that  he  will  recover  if  the 
heels  of  his  boots  are  crooked  so  as  to  deviate  body 
weight  on  to  the  outer  side  of  the  foot. 

The  patient  should  therefore  at  once  be  put  through  the 
last  stage  of  treatment  described  under  Acute  Flat-foot — 
namely,  graduated  exercises,  and  he  need  not  be  taken 
off  duty  for  more  than  a  day  or  two  while  his  boots  are 
being  altered.  "  Contrast  baths  "  of  hot  and  cold  water 
alternately,  to  stimulate  the  circulation  of  the  foot,  are 
a  great  relief 'to  the  patient,  especially  at  night,  when 
his  feet  may  be  a  little  sore  and  swollen  after  walking 
about  all  day. 

CONCLUSION 

I  have  purposely  avoided  all  mention  of  tiptoe  exercise. 
These  exercises  are  excellent,  but  they  will  not  cure  a 
flat-foot  if  the  patient  is  allowed  to  come  down  in  the 
flat-footed  position  in  the  intervals. 

If  the  principle  of  deviation  of  body  weight  on  to  the 
outer  edge  be  loyally  adhered  to,  every  ordinary  case  will 
recover,  even  without  special  tiptoe  exercise.  Loyal 
adhesion  to  the  principle  stated  means  that  the  patient 
never  sets  foot  to  the  ground  except  in  a  properly 
crooked  boot,  shoe,  or  slipper.  Even  in  his  bath  he 
must  be  careful  to  stand  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  foot. 
The  whole  idea  of  treatment  is  to  ensure  that  uninter- 
rupted adaptive  shortening  of  stretched  structures  shall 
take  place. 

Massage,  tiptoe  exercises,  electric  stimulation  of 
muscles,  all  help  to  hasten  the  recovery,  but  a  few 
minutes'  careless  walking  without  boots  or  shoes  will 
undo  all  benefit  from  other  treatment  by  again  stretching 
recovering  structures. 

Frequently  the  high-arched  foot  is  the  most  trouble- 
some type  when  the  tendons  are  strained  and  the 
ligaments  begin  to  give.  The  strain  upon  the  astragalo- 
scaphoid  joint  in  this  type  is,  for  obvious  mechanical 
reasons,  great,  and  the  progress  of  the  affection  is  often 


38  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

marked  by  a  prominence  about  the  scaphoid  due  to 
pressure  osteitis. 

CLAW-FOOT 

One  of  the  surprises  the  military  surgeon  meets  is  the 
number  of  men  with  claw-feet  who  have  been  passed  into 
the  Army  ;  but  still  more  surprising  is  the  fact  that  many 
such  cases  have  found  their  way  to  the  front  after  the 
vigorous  initial  training  which  the  recruit  undergoes. 
Sooner  or  later,  however,  these  men  gravitate  to  hos- 
pital, and  very  few  of  them  return  to  the  ranks  as 
efficients.  A  patient  with  this  condition  of  the  foot  is 
quite  unfit  for  military  service,  and  should  never  be 
accepted  as  a  recruit.  The  affection  usually  begins  in 
early  life,  and  is  often  not  recognized  until  it  has  reached 
what  I  have  termed  its  second  stage  ;  until  then  serious 
trouble  hardly  ever  arises. 

The  etiology  of  "  claw  "  or  "  hollow  "  foot  is  still  un- 
certain. It  is  very  often  associated  with  a  slight  con- 
traction of  the  Achilles  tendon  in  childhood,  and  in  some 
cases  is  due  to  a  transitory  paralysis  of  the  extensor 
group  of  muscles.  The  short  boot  also  stands  in  some 
causal  relation  to  it.  The  whole  question  is,  however, 
too  vexed  to  be  discussed  here. 

Clinically  the  condition  presents  five  degrees  or  stages. 
The  progress  of  the  development  of  the  deformity  from 
one  degree  to  another,  though  often  continuous,  is  fre- 
quently arrested  in  one  of  the  early  stages  ;  or  perhaps 
the  facts  may  be  better  stated  by  saying  that  progress 
from  the  first  two  stages  to  the  later  more  severe  stages  is 
very  slow,  and  sometimes  does  not  take  place. 

FIRST  DEGREE  OF  CLAW-FOOT 

The  first  degree  occurs  in  childhood,  and  is  easily 
overlooked.  There  is  no  visible  increase  in  the  height 
of  the  arch — in  fact,  the  foot  appears  normal.  The  com- 
plaint made  is  that  the  child  is  clumsy,  especially 
when  running,  and  frequently  stumbles  or  trips  without 
obvious  cause. 

It  will  be  found  in  such  a  case  that  the  foot  cannot  be 
dorsiflexed  beyond  a  right  angle  with  the  leg,  and  that 
there  is  commencing  contraction  of  the  Achilles  tendon 
and  the  structures  in  the  sole.  The  child's  tendency  to 
stumble  is  thus  explained,  for  the  fore  part  of  his  foot 
gets  in  his  way  as  he  tries  to  run. 

The  treatment  in  this  stage  is  obviously  to  stretch 
the  Achilles  tendon  and  the  plantar  structures,  and  so 
restore  the  power  of  dorsiflexion  of  the  foot  at  the  ankle. 
This  can  usually  be  effected  by  manipulation,  after 
which  the  boot  in  which  the  patient  walks  should  have 


CLAW-FOOT 


39 


no  heel  to  it,  but  a  bar  £  in.  thick  placed  transversely 
under  the  tread.  In  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary 
to  lengthen  the  Achilles  tendon.  This  is  best  done 
subcutaneously  by  the  following  procedure  :  The  teno- 
tome  is  entered  on  one  side  near  the  heel,  and  one  half 
only  of  the  tendon  is  divided.  The  tenotome  is  next 
entered  1^-2  in.  farther  up  on  the  other  side,  and  the 
other  half  of  the  tendon  is  divided.  Now,  by  forcible 
dorsiflexion  of  the  foot,  the  two  halves  of  the  tendon  are 
made  to  slide  on  one  another  until  the  required  lengthen- 
ing is  obtained  (Figs.  38  A,  38  B).  A  rectangular  splint  is 
then  applied  so  as  to  keep  the  Achilles  tendon  at  rest  in 
the  corrected  position  and  to  maintain  tension  on  the 


Fig.  38. — Anatomical  diagram  to  illustrate  the  two  stages  of  the  operation  for 
the  lengthening  of  the  Achilles  tendon  by  subcutaneous  tenotomy. 

sole  of  the  foot.  This  method  is  always  preferable  to 
that  of  complete  division  of  the  tendon  at  one  level,  as 
the  period  of  convalescence  is  shortened,  and  functional 
power  in  the  calf  muscles  is  more  speedily  restored. 


SECOND  DEGREE  OF  CLAW-FOOT 

In  this  degree  there  is  definite  contraction  of  the 
plantar  fascia,  and  the  characteristic  deformity  of 
the  foot  is  easily  observed  (Fig.  39).  The  fore  part 
of  the  foot  is  dropped — that  is  to  say,  there  is  flexion 
at  the  mid-tarsal  joint  or  exaggeration  of  the  arch  of 
the  foot.  At  the  same  time  the  great  toe  is  dorsiflexed 
at  the  metatarso-phalangeal  joint,  and  the  tendon  of 
the  extensor  proprius  hallucis  stands  out  prominently. 
Further,  if  the  surgeon  places  his  finger  under  the  ball 
of  the  great  toe  he  easily  lifts  it,  and  the  toe  automatically 


40  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

straightens  out  (Fig.  40).  The  other  toes  do  not  present 
a  similar  deformity  at  this  stage,  but  the  Achilles  tendon 
is  shortened.  Even  in  this  condition  the  patient  may 
not  complain  of  pain  or  disability  ;  especially  is  this  the 
case  in  the  very  young.  In  older  folk,  such  as  the 
recruit,  complaints  may  begin  whenever  long  marches 
are  repeated.  The  men  have  to  fall  out  because  of 
pain  and  fatigue.  They  have  frequently  been  suspected 
unjustly,  for  even  at  this  stage  there  are  no  very  obvious 
objective  signs.  The  arch  of  the  foot  is  not  collapsed, 
but,  on  the  contrary,  slightly  exaggerated;  if,  however, 
the  surgeon  makes  a  careful  examination  he  will  note 
tenderness  beneath  the  metatarso-phalangeal  range,  and 
when  the  patient  is  asked  to  extend  his  toes  the  big  toe 
responds  to  a  disproportionate  extent. 

Treatment  at    this    stage  must  be  drastic.     If  the 
patient  is  to  be  rendered  able  to  get  about  with  ease 


Pit.  39. — Claw-foot,  Fig.  40.— Claw-foot,   second    degree, 

second  degree.  The   surgeon's  finger    easily  replaces 

the  dropped  head    of  the  metatarsal 
bone  of  the  great  toe ;  a  case  in  this 
stage    is    suitable   for    tendon    trans- 
plantation. 

and  comfort,  nothing  less  than  operation  will  suffice.  A 
radical  attack  may  save  the  situation,  and  in  a  few  weeks 
the  soldier  may  return  to  duty.  The  operation  consists 
in  dividing  and  stretching  the  plantar  fascia  and  then  in 
making  an  incision  over  the  tendon  of  the  extensor  of 
the  great  toe  (extensor  proprius  hallucis),  and  the  tendon 
is  severed  from  its  attachment.  Two  holes  are  drilled 
close  to  each  other  behind  the  metatarsal  head,  forming 
a  tunnel,  through  which  the  tendon  is  drawn  by  means 
of  a  catgut  ligature  (Fig.  41).  The  tendon  is  then  pulled 
so  as  to  raise  the  dropped  metatarsal  head  into  position 
(Fig.  43),  and  its  lower  end  is  stitched  to  its  upper 
part  just  above  its  entrance  into  the  bone  (Fig.  42). 
This  completes  the  operation,  but  the  foot  must  be  firmly 
bandaged  down  to  a  metal  sole  plate  with  a  thick  roll 
of  wool  placed  transversely  just  behind  the  heads  of  the 
metatarsals  so  as  to  flatten  the  arch  as  much  as  possible. 
The  whole  foot  is  then  fixed  in  a  rectangular  foot  splint, 
which  is  bent  to  rather  less  than  a  right  angle.  After 


CLAW-FOOT  4t 

the  stitches  are  taken  out,  the  foot  is  put  up  in  plaster- 
of-Paris  in  the  fully  corrected  position,  and  the  patient 


fit.  41. — Claw-foot,  second  de' 
gree.  Operation  by  transplanta- 
tion of  tendon  of  the  extensor  of 
the  great  toe.  The  diagram  shows 
how  the  tendon  of  the  extensor 
proprius  hallucis  is  introduced 
through  the  tunnel  above  the  head 
of  the  metatarsal  bone. 


Fig.  42.— Claw-foot.  Operation  for 
second  degree,  showing  how  the 
tendon  of  the  extensor  proprius 
hallucii,  after  traversing  the  tunnel 
in  the  bone,  is  attached  to  itself  and 
secured. 


is  allowed  to  walk  in  this  for  from  three  to  six  weeks. 
He  should  then  for  a  few  weeks  wear  boots  with  very 
low  heels,  and  a  bar  across  the  sole  beneath  the  heads  of 


Fig.  43. — Claw-foot,  second  degree.    Operation  showing  the  tendon  of  the 

extensor  proprius  hallucis  passed  through  the  head  of  the  metatarsal  bone 

of  the  great  toe  and  pulled  before  fixing. 

the  metatarsal  bones  so  as  to  keep  the  foot  dorsiflexed 
when  walking. 


42  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

THIRD  DEGREE  OF  CLAW-FOOT 

In  the  third  degree  the  characteristic  deformity  is 
more  pronounced  (Fig.  44)  ;  it  is  no  longer  possible  with 
the  finger  to  lift  the  head  of  the  first  metatarsal  into 
normal  line  owing  to  the  increased  contraction  of  plantar 
structures  ;  the  operation  just  described  for  the  second 
degree  would  therefore  be  useless.  Further,  the  other 
toes  also  are  now  dorsiflexed,  and  the  characteristic 
deformity  which  at  first  was  visible  only  in  the  great  toe 
is  now  shared  by  all  the  toes.  The  movements  of  the 
toes  are  limited,  and  they  are  beginning  to  become  rigid 
in  the  position  of  deformity.  Corns  and  callosities  are 
formed  across  the  ball  of  the  foot  owing  to  the  increased 
pressure  of  body  weight,  for  in  this  stage  the  patient  can 
hardly  get  his  heel  to  the  ground  at  all.  The  Achilles 
tendon  and  plantar  fascia  are  still  more  contracted  than 
in  the  first  two  stages. 


Fig.  44.— Claw-foot,  third  degree.  Fig.  45.— Claw-foot,  fourth  degree. 

Operative  treatment  has  now   to  be  carried  out  in 
two  stages. 

1.  The  first  stage  includes  division  of  the  plantar  fascia 
and  severe  wrenching  to  flatten  the  foot  as  far  as  possible, 
but  as  at  this  stage  all  the  metatarsal  bones  are  very 
obliquely  placed  it  is  necessary  also  to  remove  bone. 
The  operation  consists  in  removing,  through  separate 
incisions  on  the  dorsum  of  the  foot,  a  half  to  one  inch 
of    the    shaft    of    the    first,  second,  third,  and    fourth 
metatarsal  bones  toward  the  bases  without  opening  the 
joints.     The  fifth  metatarsal  is  retained  intact,   as  it 
forms  a  useful  splint  for  the  rest  of  the  bones.     Re- 
moval of  the  head  of  the  metatarsal  should  be  avoided. 
The  extensor  and  flexor  tendons  should  be  divided. 

2.  As  it  is  impossible  to  correct  all  the  cavus  deformity 
in  this  way,  the  Achilles  tendon  is  divided  at  a  later 
stage  by  the  sliding  operation,  and  the  foot  wrenched 
into  dorsiflexion.     The  after-treatment  and  alteration  in 
boots  follow  the  same  lines  as  those  already  prescribed. 

FOURTH  DEGREE  OF  CLAW-FOOT 

In  the  fourth  stage,  in  addition  to  all  the  deformities 
already  described  the  foot  acquires  a  well-marked  varus 


CLAW-FOOT 


43 


deformity  (Fig.  45).     Callosities  are  even  more  tender, 
and  walking  is  painful  and  difficult. 

Treatment  has  to  be  still  more  drastic.  All  tense 
structures  must  be  tenotomized  and  stretched  by  wrench- 
ing so  as  to  mould  the  foot  towards  the  correct  position  ; 
it  will  be  necessary  to  divide  also  the  flexor  and  extensor 
tendons,  and  then  remove  the  astragalus.  This  releases 
the  remaining  tension  on  the  sole,  and  the  foot  can  be 
moulded  into  shape,  so  as  eventually  to  carry  the  body 
weight  with  comfort  to  the  patient. 


FIFTH  DEGREE  OF  CLAW-FOOT 

The  last  stage  of  claw-foot  leaves  the  patient  in  a 
pitiable  condition.     The  toes  are  blue  and  contracted, 


Fig.  46.  —  Claw- 
foot,  fifth  degree. 


Fig.  48.  -Claw-foot,  fifth 

degree.     Side  view  after 

same  operation. 


Fig.  47.  —  Claw-foot, 
fifth  degree.  Front 
view  after  operation 
recommended  in  the 
text.  The  toes  and 
the  heads  of  the  meta- 
tarsal  bones,  as  well 
as  the  astragalus,  have 
been  removed. 

the  callosities  exquisitely  tender.  The  deformity  is 
that  of  equino-varus  (Fig.  46).  The  patient  longs  for 
amputation.  This  should  never  be  done,  and  I  would 
recommend  as  a  substitute  an  operation  I  have  designed 
and  practised  with  success  on  many  occasions. 

In  such  a  case  the  astragalus  should  first  be  removed, 
and  then  a  flap  incision  made  along-  the  base  of  the  toes 
on  the  sole  of  the  foot.  A  flap  should  also  be  raised 
from  the  dorsum  of  the  foot,  and  the  heads  of  the 
metatarsal  bones  exposed.  The  toes  and  the  heads  of 
the  metatarsal  bones  are  removed.  The  result  of  this 
operation  is  excellent  (Figs.  47  and  48). 

Although   the   various   operative  procedures   I   have 


44 

described  as  necessary  in  the  treatment  of  the  later 
stages  of  claw-foot  do  not  result  in  producing  an 
efficient  soldier,  there  is  every  reason  why  they  should 
be  known.  The  military  surgeon  has  to  consider  the 
usefulness  of  citizens  when  the  war  is  ended,  and 
operations  such  as  I  have  described,  with  appropriate 
variation,  will  be  needed  for  many  types  of  contracted 
feet  following  injuries  received  from  the  enemy. 

HALLUX  RIGIDUS  AND  HALLUX  VALGUS 

The  conditions  known  as  hallux  rigidus,  hallux  valgus, 
and  metatarsalgia,  or  Morton's  disease,  are  all  frequently 
associated  with  flat-foot ;  they  all  have  some  features  in 
common  both  as  regards  the  nature  of  the  pain  ex- 
perienced, and  the  alterations  required  in  the  boot  to 
relieve  mild  cases,  and  to  complete  the  after-treatment 
in  cases  which  have  required  operation. 

Mobility  of  the  Toe. — This  is  a  convenient  point  at 
which  to  make  a  digression  to  discuss  the  importance 
of  correct  position  and  free  mobility  of  the  great  toe  in 
marching. 

The  great  toe  is  directed  slightly  inwards  towards 
the  middle  line  of  the  body  in  young  children  of  all 
races,  in  line  with  the  anterior  part  of  the  inner  longi- 
tudinal arch  of  the  foot,  to  the  structure  of  which  atten- 
tion was  directed  in  the  section  on  Flat-foot.  (See  pp. 
27,  28.)  Races  who  habitually  go  barefooted  preserve 
this  position  of  the  great  toe  in  adult  life.  In  civilized 
races — those,  at  least,  who  wear  boots — the  toes  are 
often  cramped  into  boots  of  unsuitable  shape,  so  that 
the  small  muscles  of  the  foot  suffer  atrophy  from  disuse, 
and  the  power  to  spread  the  great  toe  inwards  in  walking 
is  much  impaired.  The  great  toe  of  a  strong  foot, 
which  has  not  been  deformed  by  wearing  pointed 
boots,  is  spread  inwards  by  the  action  of  the  abductor 
hallucis  when  balancing  on  one  foot,  when  the  weight  of 
the  body  is  on  the  fore  part  of  the  foot  in  walking,  and 
still  more  so  when  carrying  a  pack  on  the  shoulders. 

Qualities  of  a  Good  Marching  Boot. — A  good  march- 
ing boot  should,  therefore,  leave  the  foot  free  to  adapt 
itself  to  altering  conditions  of  balance  and  strain. 

1.  The  boot  should  fit  comfortably  and  closely  round 
the  heel   and  ankle  so  as   to  avoid   lifting  of  the  heel 
in  the  boot,  which  results  in  chafing,  ending  in  a  blister 
of  the  heel. 

2.  To  save  the  arch  from  giving  way  and  to  avoid 
flat-foot  the  heel  of  the  boot  should  be  slightly  higher  on 
the  inner  side  than  on  the  outer.     (Fig.  13.) 

3.  The  inner  side  of  the  boot  should  be  straight  right 
up  to  the  tip  of  the  big  toe — that  is  to  say,  the  inner 


A   GOOD   MARCHING   BOOT  45 

sides  of  the  two  boots  should  be  parallel  to  each  other  all 
the  way  along  to  the  great  toe.  There  should  be  no  trace 
of  pointedness,  for  pointedness  tends  to  produce  hallux 
valgus  and  helps  to  cause  flat-foot. 

4.  The  sole  of  the  boot  inside  should  be  as  broad  as 
the  foot  with  the  weight  of  the  body  on  it.     In  the  case 
of  a  soldier  it  should  be  as  broad  as  the  foot  is  when 
carrying  the  weight  of  the  soldier  in  full  marching  order 
— that   is   to  say,  the  weight    of   the  man   himself,  his 
pack,  and  all  his  accoutrements. 

5.  The  upper  of  the  boot  should  not  compress  the  fore 
part  of  the  foot  in  any  way.     The  toecap  should  be  stiff 
and  deep  enough  to  clear  the  toes  and  allow  free  move- 
ment inside  the  boot.     This  stiffening  should  run  back 
on  the  inner  side  of  the  boot  to  a  point  behind  the 
metatarso-phalangeal  joint  of  the  great  toe. 

6.  The  boot  should  be  long  enough  to  allow  the  foot 
to  extend  to  its  full  length  when  the  soldier  is  carrying 
his  pack  and  all  his  accoutrements. 

These  last  points,  dealing  with  freedom  of  movement 
of  the  fore  part  of  the  foot,  are  essential  to  the  full  de- 
velopment of  the  small  muscles  of  the  foot  on  which  the 
soldier's  endurance  and  marching  powers  depend  to  so 
large  an  extent. 

Corns  do  not  develop  in  a  foot  encased  in  a  boot  which 
allows  free  play  to  the  fore  part  of  the  foot.  The  regi- 
mental chiropodist  is  a  most  valuable  asset,  but  his 
existence  is,  ipso  facto,  a  confession  that  the  fit  of  the 
men's  boots  is  not  all  it  might  and  ought  to  be.  The  man 
should  not  be  allowed  to  judge  of  the  tightness  of  his  boot 
when  his  foot  is  cool.  On  the  contrary,  boots  should  be 
served  out  when  men  have  come  in  from  a  long  route 
march,  and  their  feet  are  engorged  with  blood,  and  there- 
fore at  their  largest.  If  this  were  done,  interference 
with  the  circulation  of  the  foot  by  the  boot  would  less 
often  occur.  When  a  foot  swells  after  a  march,  the 
swelling  is  practically  all  in  the  fore  part,  not  round  the 
heel.  To  serve  out  boots,  therefore,  after  a  route  march 
would  not  prevent  a  man  from  choosing  a  pair  which 
fitted  properly  round  the  heel  and  ankle. 

The  present  Army  boot  is  a  great  improvement  on  the 
boot  served  out  at  the  time  of  the  South  African  War,  but 
it  is  still  lacking  in  two  points — namely,  the  straight 
inner  side  and  the  clear  free  stiffened  arch  in  the  upper 
of  the  fore  part. 

HALLUX  RIGIDUS 

Hallux  rigidus  (Fig.  49)  is  a  condition  characterized 
by  limitation  of  the  power  to  dorsiflex  the  great  toe  at 
the  metatarso-phalangeal  joint. 

If   we   remember   that  in  straining   on   tiptoe   or   in 


46  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

stepping  off  witjj  the  foot  in  marching  this  joint  must  be 
dorsiflexed,  it  is  evident  that  any  limitation  of  the  move- 
ment of  dorsiflexion  must,  in  the  course  of  a  long  or 
hard  march,  result  in  straining  the  joint  so  that  it  be- 
comes painful  and  inflamed. 

As  hallux  rigidus  and  hallux  valgus  are  both  disorders 
of  the  same  joint  and  are  often  intimately  connected, 
the  rigid  toe  may  lead  on  to  valgus  deformity  and  a 
hallux  valgus  may  become  rigid.  There  is  no  essential 
difference  in  the  pathological  condition  of  the  joint, 
but  only  in  the  direction  of  the  deformity  associated 
with  it. 

Treatment. — The  treatment  of  hallux  rigidus  must 
be  directed  to  restoring  the  power  of  dorsiflexion  of  the 
great  toe  at  the  metatarso-phalangeal  joint. 

In  the  early  stages,  when  the  tenderness  and  inflam- 
mation either  about  the  joint  or  in  the  joint  has  not 


Fig.  49.— Hallux  rigidus. 

resulted  in  osseous  changes,  palliative  measures  may 
still  lead  to  recovery. 

First,  the  joint  must  be  relieved  of  strain,  so  that  the 
inflammation  may  be  allayed.  This  can  be  brought 
about  by  arranging  a  bar  like  a  football  bar  fully  $  in. 
thick  and  about  i  in.  broad  placed  on  the  boot  behind 
the  head  of  the  metatarsal  bone  (Fig.  59).  This  causes 
the  body  weight  to  be  borne  on  the  neck  of  the  metatarsal 
rather  than  on  the  tender  joint,  so  assuring  rest  to  the 
joint.  As  soon  as  the  inflammatory  tenderness  becomes 
less  the  patient  finds  that  the  power  to  dorsiflex  the  toe 
begins  to  return.  This  is  the  moment  to  begin  massage, 
movement,  and  hot  and  cold  contrast  bathing  in  order  to 
hurry  up  the  processes  of  repair. 

In  more  advanced  cases,  and  in  cases  resulting  directly 
from  trauma — as,  for  instance,  dropping  a  weight  on  the 
joint  or  violently  "  stubbing  "  the  toe,  osseous  changes 
due  to  formative  periostitis  occur  round  the  joint.  There 
may  be  lipping  of  the  base  of  the  phalanx,  and  usually 
there  is  some  nodular  thickening  of  the  head  of  he 
metatarsal,  especially  in  its  upper  aspect.  This  osseous 
outgrowth  forms  a  mechanical  block,  preventing  hyper- 


HALLUX  VALGUS 


47 


extension.  The  impact  of  the  bones  on  each  other 
maintains  the  periostitis,  and  the  condition  gets  pro- 
gressively worse.  Palliative  measures  may  enable  a 
civilian  to  go  about  his  business  with  some  degree  of 
comfort,  but  he  cannot  do  a  day's  shooting,  and  pallia- 
tive measures  are  of  no  use  for  a  man  who  must  march. 

Operation  alone  will  remove  the  obstruction  to  move- 
ment and  give  permanent  relief. 

The  operation  follows  exactly  the  lines  to  be  described 
below  for  hallux  valgus. 

HALLUX  VALGUS 

Hallux  valgus  (Fig.  50)  is  a  deformity  of  the  first 
metatarso-phalangeal  joint,  the  essential  feature  of 


Fig.  50.— Hallux  valgus. 

which  is  that  the  great  toe  is  deflected  outwards,  and 
in  extreme  cases  may  lie  over  or  under  the  second  toe. 

One  consequence  of  this  position  of  deformity  is  that 
the  head  of  the  metatarsal  and  the  base  of  the  proximal 
phalanx  form  an  undue  angular  prominence  on  the  inner 
border  of  the  foot.  As  a  result  of  chafing  and  pressure 
by  the  boot,  a  bursa,  or  bunion,  forms  over  the  thinned 


48  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

inner  part  of  the  capsule  of  the  joint.  It  may  com- 
municate with  the  synovial  cavity. 

The  continued  pressure  and  friction  cause  the  skin 
over  the  bursa  to  become  indurated  and  horny,  and  this 
greatly  adds  to  the  pain  and  discomfort  suffered  by  the 
patient. 

Frequently  suppurative  inflammation  occurs  in  the 
bursa  (septic  bursitis)  ;  this  may  be  followed  by  septic 
cellulitis  with  inflammatory  thickening  of  the  tissue^ 
round  the  joint,  or,  in  cases  in  which  the  bursa  communi- 
cates with  the  joint  cavity,  it  may  lead  directly  to  septic 
arthritis. 

It  has  been  a  surprise  to  many  surgeons  that  soldiers 
have  been  able  to  go  through  their  training  and  even  to 
serve  in  France  with  pronounced  hallux  valgus  de- 
formity. The  reason  is  that  the  disability  is  not  due 
merely  to  the  visible  deformity  but  to  the  addition  of 
the  following  three  conditions  : 

1.  Inflammation  of  the  bursa  (bunion). 

2.  Traumatic  arthritis,  of  the  same  type  as  the 
arthritis  in  cases  of  hallux  rigidus. 

3.  Tenderness  due  to  pressure  on  digital  nerves  in 
every  respect  similar  to  the  tenderness  in  a  classical 
case  of  metatarsalgia  or  Morton's  disease.  i 

Bursitis  is  the  most  common  of  these  three  causes  of 
disability  ;  the  dangers  of  septic  bursitis  communicating 
with  the  joint  have  already  been  noted. 

Arthritis  is  much  more  rare,  and  is  usually  of  the  sub- 
acute  type  common  in  cases  of  hallux  rigidus  without  the 
valgoid  deformity.  It  is  diagnosed  by  tenderness  and 
pain  on  any  movement  of  the  joint,  even  gentle  attempts 
at  passive  rotation  of  the  toe. 

The  third  variety,  comparable  to  Morton's  disease,  is 
marked  by  acute  pain  on  oblique  pressure  on  the  joint 
between  the  finger  and  thumb, .and -is  due  to  excessive 
sensitiveness  of  the  digital  nerves  and  adjacent  tissues 
outside  the  joint.  It  is  not,  as  a  rule,  characterized  by 
any  objective  signs  other  than  the  valgoid  deformity,  and 
in  cases  of  hallux  rigidus  of  this  variety  there  is  no  visible 
deformity — only  tenderness  on  pressure  on  the  joint. 

It  is  difficult  to  make  a  sharp  division  between  hallux 
rigidus  and  hallux  valgus.  The  same  types  of  pain  and 
disability  occur  in  both.  It  may,  however,  be  said  that 
with  a  distinct  valgoid  deformity  it  is  comparatively  rare 
to  find  rigidity,  but  that  in  cases  of  painful  great  toe 
without  valgoid  deformity — that  is,  in  cases  classed  as 
hallux  rigidus — arthritis  and  the  resulting  rigidity  are 
much  more  common.  Hence  the  difference  in  descrip- 
tive terminology — but  to  understand  the  conditions 
properly  they  should  be  taken  together. 


HALLUX    VALGUS  49 

Treatment. —  Palliative  measures  may  suffice  in 
mild  cases.  First,  the  weight  of  the  body  should  be 
taken  off  the  joint  by  putting  a  bar — like  a  football  bar 
— across  the  sole  of  the  boot  behind  the  head  of  the 
metatarsal  (Fig.  59).  If  the  boots  are  specially  made, 
this  is  worked  into  the  thickness  of  the  sole  with  a  hollow 
in  the  sole  for  the  great  toe-joint.  The  bar  on  the  sole 
will,  however,  keep  a  man  on  his  feet  who  would  other- 
wise be  disabled  by  pain  in  the  great  toe-joint.  The 
boot  should,  of  course,  be  straight  on  the  inner  side, 
and  the  upper  should  spring  clear  up,  leaving  room  for 
the  large  head  of  the  first  metatarsal — a  feature  unfor- 
tunately absent  from  the  Regulation  boot.  If  the  boots 
are  roomy  enough,  a  piece  of  felt  with  a  hole  in  it  to 
accommodate  ^he  bunion  will  afford  relief. 

Such  measures,  however,  are  only  curative  in  the 
milder  cases,  and  are  not  applicable  to  the  man  on 
service. 

Operative  Treatment. — Operative  treatment  of  hallux 
valgus  must  not  aim  merely  at  correcting  the  deviation, 
but  must  also  be  directed  to  securing  free  dorsiflexion 
of  the  great  toe,  otherwise  the  patient  will  be  left  with 
all  the  disability  of  a  hallu-x  rigidus. 

It  follows,  therefore,  that,  apart  from  the  correction 
of  the  valgoid  deformity,  the  operative  procedure  is 
practically  the  same  in  principle  in  both  conditions, 
and  one  description  suffices  for  both, 
k  First,  let  it  be  stated  that  there  are  two  operations 
sometimes  performed,  which  need  only  be  mentioned  to 
be  condemned.  The  first  is  transplantation  of  the 
extensor  proprius  hallucis  tendon  to  the  inner  side  of 
the  metatarsal  head  in  the  hope  that  it  will  correct  the 
outward  deviation.  Experience  has  proved  that  this 
operation  is  generally  useless  ;  it  is  therefore  a  waste  of 
time  to  perform  it.  The  second  operation — excision 
of  the  joint — cannot  be  too  emphatically  condemned, 
as  it  is  liable  to  end  in  a  stiff  joint,  bringing  with  it  all 
the  crippling  disability  of  hallux  rigidus  in  its  worst 
form. 

Finally,  no  operation  should  be  performed  while  there 
is  any  inflammation  of  the  bursa  or  of  the  surrounding 
tissues. 

A.  In  early  cases  in  which  there  is  valgoid  deformity 
but  not  much  enlargement  of  the  head  of  the  metatarsal 
by  bony  outgrowths,  osteotomy  of  the  neck  of  the  first 
metatarsal  bone,  either  linear  or  cuneiform   (Fig.   51), 
associated    with    tenotomy    of    the    extensor    proprius 
hallucis  tendon,  will  suffice. 

B.  In    later    stages,    with    bony   excrescences    round 
the  joint,  more  free  removal  of  bone  and  some  form 
of  pseudarthrosis  must  be  performed  in  order  to  secure 


50  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

the  free  movement  of  the  toe,  which  is  indispensable 
to  comfort. 

1.  Free  exsection  of  the  head  of  the  first  metatarsal 
bone,  with  interposition  of  a  flap  of  tissue,  or  of  part  of 
the  bursa,  is  not  satisfactory  in  a  soldier,  though  it  has 
proved  satisfactory  in  civilians  who  do  not  have  hard 
walking  or  marching  to  do.     The  reason  is  that  the  lower 
part  of  the  head  of  the  bone  is  an  important  part  of  the 
weight-bearing  apparatus,  and  must  be  preserved. 

2.  The  operation  to  be  preferred  is  resection  of  the 
head  of  the  metatarsal  bone  (Fig.  52),  leaving  as  much 


Fig.  51.— Hallux  valgus.     To  illustrate  osteotomy  of  the  neck  of  the 
metatarsal  bone,  showing  the  wedge  to  be  removed. 

as  possible  of  the  lower  part,  taking  care  to  clear  away 
all  bony  excrescences  which  obstruct  dorsiflexion  or 
full  correction  of  the  valgus  deformity.  The  bursal  flap 
is  then  interposed  as  a  covering  for  the  raw  surface  of 
bone.  At  one  time  I  used  to  interpose  the  whole  bursal 
sac,  but  nearly  twenty  years  ago  several  patients  de- 
veloped bursitis  in  the  transposed  bursa.  The  procedure 
I  now  adopt,  therefore,  is  to  open  the  bursa  and  interpose 
only  one  wall  as  a  covering  for  the  bone  (Fig.  53),  or  to 
obliterate  the  bursal  cavity. 

3.  In  some  cases  (more  often  in  cases  of  hallux  rigidus 
than  in  those  of  hallux  valgus)  it  is  possible  to  preserve 
the  articular  cartilage  of  the  head  of  the  metatarsal 
bone.  This  may  be  done  in  two  ways  :  The  one  method 
is  to  remove  a  wedge  or  slice  from  the  posterior  part  of 


HALLUX   VALGUS  5* 

the  head  and  then  apply  the  cartilage  to  the  raw  surface 
of  bone.  The  other  is  to  cut  a  wedge  of  bone  with  the 
cartilage  and  mortise  it  into  a  cleft  made  in  the  bone 
farther  back,  removing  the  intermediate  bone. 


Fig.  52.— Hallux  valgas.    To  illustrate  resection  of  head  of  the 
metatarsal  bone  by  oblique  incision  through  the  bone. 

In  every  case  division  of  the  extensor  proprius  hallucis 
is  an  essential  part  of  the  operation  for  hallux  valgus, 
otherwise  the  traction  of  this  muscle  will  tend  to  re- 
produce the  deformity. 

Technique  of  the  Operation  and  After-treatment. — The 
skin  incision  should  be  a  linear  incision  along  the  inner 


Fig.  53. — Hallux  valgus.    Showing  flap  to  cover  the  end  of  the  metatarsal 
bone  in  the  operation  illustrated  in  Fig.  52. 

side  of  the  joint.  The  flap  incision  round  the  bursa 
described  by  Mayo  has  not  proved  entirely  satisfactory 
in  my  experience. 

The  skin  having  been  freed  and  retracted,  a  flap 
incision  is  made  in  the  underlying  tissues  with  a  second 
knife.  The  knife  used  for  the  skin  may  be  infected  with 
Staphylococcus  albus  from  the  skin  ;  it  is  therefore  a  wise 
precaution  never  to  use  the  skin  knife  for  any  deeper 


52  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

dissection,  especially  in  plastic  operations  where  the 
least  infection  may  destroy  the  value  of  the  operation. 

The  joint  is  thus  opened,  and  the  head  of  the  meta- 
tarsal  freely  exposed.  The  surgeon  can  then  decide  how 
much  bone  he  is  to  remove  and  exactly  how  the  wedge 
is  to  be  made  so  that  the  toe  will  be  correctly  in  line  after 
the  operation.  He  can  also  decide  whether  he  can  use- 
fully retain  the  articular  cartilage,  or  is  to  dissect  out  a 
flap  of  the  wall  of  the  bursa  to  cover  the  raw  bone. 

It  should  be  noted  that  the  sesamoid  bones  should 
rarely  be  removed,  as  they  seem  to  form  an  essential  part 
of  the  tread  of  the  ball  of  the  great  toe.  The  pad  of  fat 
between  the  sesamoid  bones  is,  however,  sometimes 
thickened,  red,  and  tender  ;  if  so  it  may  be  clipped  away. 


Fig.  54. — Splint  for  hallux  valgus  after  operation. 


The  whole  operation  must  be  carefully  carried  out 
with  the  most  scrupulous  attention  to  three  points  : 

1.  Preservation  of  part  of  the  lower  or  weight- 
bearing  portion  of  the  head. 

2.  Restoration  of  free  dorsiflexion,  or  the  soldier 
will  not  march  freely. 

3.  Correction  of  the  valgoid  deformity  in  cases  of 
hallux  valgus. 

The  valgoid  deformity  is  purposely  placed  last,  for  in 
a  sense  it  is  the  least  important  from  the  point  of  view  of 
restoring  the  man's  marching  power. 

A  hallux  vagus  splint  should  be  applied  at  the  end  of 
the  operation.  The  splint  I  use  is  made  of  thin  metal, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  54.  The  hole  in  the  splint  fits  over  the 
inner  side  of  the  head  of  the  metatarsal  bone  and  prevents 
pressure  from  occurring  at  this  prominent  point.  The 
base  of  the  splint  is  strapped  or  bandaged  to  the  inner 
side  of  the  foot.  The  toe  is  then  drawn  inwards  and 
secured  to  the  narrow  end  of  the  splint,  care  being  taken 
that  the  alignment  is  correct. 

After-treatment  in  cases  of  hallux  rigidus  and  hallux 


HAMMER-TOE  53 

valgus  is  quite  as  important  as  the  operation  if  we  are  to 
succeed  in  restoring  function.  Three  weeks  after  the 
operation  the  patient  may  walk,  provided  he  has  a  proper 
boot.  Gradual  exercise  and  the  correct  bearing  of  the 
body  weight  in  a  properly  designed  boot  is  an  essential 
part  of  the  treatment. 

The  boot,  in  the  first  instance,  should  be  made  of  soft 
material  with  a  stiff  leather  sole.  On  the  sole  is  put  a 
leather  bar  J  in.  thick  and  f  in.  to  i  in.  wide  behind 
the  heads  of  the  metatarsal  bones.  The  body  weight 
thus  falls  for  the  time  on  the  necks  of  the  metatarsals 
rather  than  on  the  heads.  Further,  the  heel  should  be 
made  J  in.  higher  on  the  inner  side  than  on  the  outer  side, 
in  order  to  deviate  body  weight  to  the  outer  side  of  the 
foot  and  relieve  strain  on  the  inner  side  and  great  toe 
(Fig.  12).  This  is,  of  course,  also  the  appropriate  treat- 
ment for  the  flat-foot  so  commonly  associated  both  with 
hallux  valgus  and  rigidus*.  The  inner  border  of  the  boot 
must  be  straight,  to  allow  the  toe  to  be  drawn  inwards 
freely,  so  that  no  pressure  of  the  boot  will  tend  to  repro- 
duce the  valgus  deformity. 

As  a  rule,  patients  shod  in  this  way  can  walk  at  once 
with  comfort.  Later,  an  ordinary  boot  may  be  altered 
in  the  same  way.  The  operation  area  is  too  tender  to 
bear  the  pressure  of  leather  for  two  or  three  weeks  after 
operation. 

It  is  while  walking  in  these  boots,  with  the  body 
weight  carried  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  foot,  that  the 
real  cure  takes  place.  Under  the  normal  physiological 
stimulus  of  walking,  repair  is  hastened,  and  the  small 
muscles  of  the  foot  recover  strength. 

To  let  the  patient  get  up  in  a  slipper  is  absurd,  for  the 
weight  falls  then  on  the  head  of  the  metatarsal,  and  by 
irritating  the  new  bone  formed  at  the  site  of  operation  it 
sets  up  a  fresh  process  of  osteo-arthritis,  which  may  leave 
him  worse  than  he  was  before.  The  patient  must  there- 
fore be  strictly  kept  reclining,  and  never  allowed  to  set 
foot  to  the  ground  till  the  time  has  come  when  he  may 
be  allowed  to  walk  in  a  properly  altered  boot. 

HAMMER-TOE 

Hammer-toe  is  a  deformity  which  usually  affects  the 
second  toe,  though  it  is  common  to  find  slighter  degrees 
of  the  condition  in  other  toes.  It  consists  of  flexion  of 
the  proximal  interphalangeal  joint  and  dorsiflexion  of 
the  metatarso-phalangeal  joint  (Fig.  55).  The  prominent 
knuckle  of  the  proximal  interphalangeal  joint  chafes 
on  the  upper  of  the  boot,  while  the  tip  of  the  toe  is  pressed 
on  the  sole.  Painful  corns  naturally  develop  at  these 
points  of  pressure,  making  the  man  unfit  to  march. 


54  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

The  causes  are  numerous.  Sometimes  the  deformity  is 
congenital,  but  the  commonest  cause  is  the  crowding  of 
the  toes  in  ill-fitting,  badly  designed  boots.  Hence  it 


Fig.  55. — Hammer-toe. 


Fig.  56.— The  disability 
produced     by    amputa- 
tion of  second  toe. 


;s  common  to  find  hammer-toe  associated  with  hallux 
valgus. 

Treatment. — In  the  adult,  operative  procedure  is 
indicated  if  we  are  to  produce  a  quick  and  lasting  re- 
covery. Neither  amputation  of  the  toe  nor  an  attempt 
at  pseudo-arthrosis  of  the  proximal  interphalangeal 
should  ever  be  undertaken.  Amputation  should  not  be 
done,  because  the  absence  of  the  second  toe  increases 


Fig.  57. — Wedge  exsection  of  joint  for  hammer-toe. 


the  tendency  to  the  production  of  hallux  valgus,  and 
often  leads  to  a  second  disability  more  serious  than  the 
original  hammer-toe  (Fig.  56). 

Some  surgeons,  when  operating  to  correct  the  de- 
formity, leave  the  articular  cartilage  on  one  side  of  the 
joint  in  order  to  obtain  a  new  joint.  My  experience  is 
that  this  is  followed  by  recurrence  so  frequently  that  the 
operation  should  be  condemned  as  uncertain. 


DISPLACEMENT  OF   LITTLE   TOE      55 


Operation. — The  operation  found  most  uniformly 
satisfactory  is  a  wedge-shaped  incision  removing  the 
articular  cartilage  on  both  sides  of  the  joint,  so  as 
definitely  to  ankylose  the  joint  in  extension.  An  oval 
piece  of  skin,  including  the  corn,  is  excised  over  the 
prominent  knuckle.  A  wedge,  base  upwards,  including 
the  joint,  is  then  excised,  of  sufficient  size  to  allow  the 
toe  to  be  straightened  (Fig.  57).  The  flexor  tendon  is 
divided  by  tenotomy.  The  skin  incision  is  then  stitched 
so  as  to  leave  a  transverse  linear  scar.  The  toe  is  fixed 
down  to  the  toe-splint  shown  in  Fig.  58,  and  the  patient 
walks  about,  still  wearing  the  splint  inside  his  boots  for 


Fig.  58  A.— Splint 
for  hammer-toe. 


Fig-  53  B.— Splint  for 

hammer-toe   applied. 

View    from    sole    of 

foot. 


Fig.  58  c.— Splint  for 

hammer-toe   applied. 

View  from  upper  side 

of  foot. 


some  weeks,  to  make  sure  that  solid  ankylosis  occurs 
without  any  return  of  the  deformity. 

DISPLACEMENT  OF  THE  LITTLE  TOE 
A  displacement  of  the  little  toe,  similar  in  nature  to 
hallux  valgus,  frequently  occurs,  usually  as  the  result  of 
wearing  boots  which  are  too  tight  and  too  pointed. 
Occasionally  the  condition  is  congenital.  The  toe  is 
displaced  inwards  either  over  the  dorsal  or  under  the 
palmar  aspect  of  the  fourth  toe.  In  either  position  it 
is  subjected  to  undue  pressure  in  any  ordinary  boot, 
and  therefore  becomes  painful. 

Treatment. — This  condition  is  very  troublesome,  and 
when  it  occurs  in  a  soldier  an  operation  is  essential. 
The  treatment  which  may  be  applied  successfully  in 
children  has  no  place  here,  as  the  structures  have  be- 
come so  contracted,  especially  the  skin,  that  tenotomies, 
excisions,  or  simple  splintings  are  wholly  inefficient. 
Amputation  of  the  toe  is  simple  and  effective  in  most 
cases,  especially  if  no  callosities  have  formed  under  the 


56  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

metatarsal  head.  In  amputating  it  is  advisable  to  make 
an  ample  flap  to  obviate  the  result  of  subsequent  con- 
tractures  and  to  secure  a  lax  fleshy  covering  for  the  bone. 
If  a  callosity  has  formed,  no  pressure  should  be  allowed 
upon  that  area  until  by  rest  and  treatment  it  has  become 
soft  and  normal.  If  the  head  of  the  bone  is  arthritic 
and  the  condition  is  complicated  by  exostoses  or  ir- 
regularities, these  should  be  pared  away.  Only  in  very 
exceptional  circumstances  should  the  head  of  the  meta- 
tarsal be  removed,  for,  as  pointed  out  in  a  previous 
chapter,  this  forms  one  of  the  points  of  support  on 
which  a  soldier's  marching  powers  depend. 

METATARSALGIA 

Metatarsalgia  is  a  peculiarly  painful  disability  of  the 
foot  associated  with  flattening  of  the  transverse  arch. 
The  characteristic  pain  is  usually  felt  in  the  fourth 
metatarso-phalangeal  joint,  frequently  in  the  third,  and 
less  often  in  the  second.  The  pain  is  variously  described 
as  a  sharp  stab,  a  burning  pain,  or  as  if  the  patient 
was  "  stepping  on  a  red-hot  pea."  The  pain  may  come 
on  suddenly  as  the  patient  is  walking  in  the  street,  and 
cripple  him,  so  that  he  has  to  hobble  into  a  shop  and 
get  his  boot  off.  The  device  adopted  by  most  patients 
to  obtain  relief  is  to  grasp  the  metatarsals  in  the  hands 
and  squeeze  them  so  as  to  restore  the  transverse  arch. 
In  more  chronic  cases  the  affected  toe  becomes  glazed 
and  shows  signs  of  trophic  disturbance,  while  in  some  cases 
there  is  complaint  of  severe  pain  shooting  up  the  leg. 

Morton  in  his  original  description  attributed  the  pain 
to  pinching  of  the  digital  nerves  between  the  metatarsal 
heads.  The  fact  that  relief  is  obtained  by  squeezing  the 
metatarsal  heads  casts  doubt  on  the  truth  of  this  view. 
1  described  the  condition  fully  in  1897,  and  stated  that, 
as  the  result  of  the  study  of  dissections  and  frozen 
sections,  I  had  come  to  the  conclusion  that  descent  of  the 
transverse  arch  and  conseqiient  pressure  of  the  meta- 
tarsal heads  on  the  nerves  when  standing  or  walking  was 
the  real  cause  of  the  pain. 

Diagnosis  is  easily  made  by  the  characteristic  tender- 
ness elicited  by  pressing  the  offending  joint  between  the 
finger  and  the  thumb,  in  addition,  obvious  flattening 
of  the  transverse  arch  is  usually  present,  and  the  fatty 
pad  under  the  heads  of  the  metatarsals  is  absorbed  by 
the  pressure  of  the  descended  arch,  so  that  the  "  ball 
of  the  foot  "  feels  unnaturally  thin,  and  there  are  corns 
in  the  sole  under  the  unusual  points  of  pressure.  The 
condition  is  therefore  to  be  regarded  as  directly  con- 
nected with  overstrain  of  the  foot,  and  is  consequently 
associated  with  flat-foot. 


METATARSALGIA 


57 


Treatment. — Immediate  relief  can  nearly  always  be 
given  by  removing  the  pressure  of  the  body  weight  off 
the  heads  of  the  metatarsal  bones  by  a  bar  across  the 
sole  of  the  boot,  behind  them  (Fig.  59). 

The  effect  of  this  is  to  carry  the  body  weight  on  the 
necks  of  the  metatarsals.  The  heeKof  the  boot  should 
also  be  raised  £  in.  on  the  inner  side,  as  for  ordinary 
flat-foot.  A  band  of  strapping  round  the  bases  of  the 
metatarsals  to  prevent  spreading  also  helps.  These 
measures,  combined  with  exercise  of  all  the  small  mus- 
cles of  the  foot  to  restore  the  arch,  and 
massage  to  relieve  the  pain  and  improve 
nutrition,  will  suffice  to  cure  all  early 
cases  in  the  space  of  a  few  weeks. 

The  patient  should  then  be  warned 
against  wearing  narrow  boots,  which  im- 
pede the  free  play  of  the  fore  part  of  the 
foot,  and  conduce  to  atrophy  of  the  mus- 
cles of  the  foot  from  disuse. 

These  measures  do  not  suffice  for  a  cure 
in  cases  which  have  lasted  for  some  time, 
though  they  give  some  relief. 

Operation. — More  drastic  measures  are 
required  for  the  soldier's  foot.     Removal 
of  the  head  of  the  offending  metatarsal 
through  a  small  dorsal  incision  completely 
relieves  the   condition  in  90  per  cent,  of 
cases,    even    when    the    crippling    effects 
have  lasted  a  long  time  and  the  patient 
is  suffering  so  much  that  he  asks  for  amputation  of  the 
foot.     It  gives  enough  relief  in  the  remaining  cases  for 
the  patient  to  be  made  comfortable  with  a  bar  across 
the  sole  of  the  boot. 

After-treatment. — The  bar  on  the  sole  of  the  boot 
arid  crooked  heel,  already  described,  should  be  employed 
as  an  essential  part  of  the  after-treatment.  The  patient 
may  then  walk  during  the  whole  period  of  convalescence 
without  injuring  the  site  of  operation,  and  so  exciting 
new  inflammatory  changes. 

PAINFUL  CONDITIONS  ABOUT  THE  HEEL 

The  painful  conditions  about  the  heel  most  com- 
monly met  with  may  generally  be  traced  to  one  of  three 
causes : 

1.  Injuries  or  strain  about  the  insertion  of   the 
tendo  Achillis. 

2.  Spurs  of  bone  and  adventitious  bursae  under 
the  os  calcis. 

3.  Osteitis  and  periostitis  from  direct  injury  of  the 
os  calcis. 


Fig.  59.— Bar  on 
sole  of  boot  be- 
hind the  heads 
of  the  metatarsal 
bones. 


58  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

i.  INJURIES  AND  STRAINS  ABOUT  THE  INSERTION  OF 
THE  TENDO  ACHILLIS 

These  are  marked  by  pain  about  the  back  of  the 
heel  which  is  aggravated  by  walking  and  relieved  by 
rest,  but  the  pain  recurs  again  if  the  patient  is  tempted 
to  take  exercise.  The  condition  may  be  divided  into 
three  types  : 

(a)  Tenosynovitis,  in  which  there  is  swelling  due  to 
effusion    within     the     tendon     sheath.     This     swelling 
extends    some   distance   up    the   tendon,    and    is    both 
palpable  and  visible. 

The  treatment  is  counter-irritation,  firm  bandaging 
and  rest.  When  the  acute  stage  is  past,  the  patient 
may  'be  allowed  to  walk  limited  distances  with  the 
heel  of  the  boot  raised  £  in.,  so  as  to  relax  the  tendon 
and  diminish  the  strain.  If  the  condition  tends  to 
become  chronic,  the  actual  cautery  may  be  used  with 
great  benefit,  especially  in  the  form  of  the  heated  needle. 

(b)  Bursitis  of  the  bursa  under  the  insertion  of  the 
tendon  into  the  os  calcis.     This  is  diagnosed  by  local- 
izing the  tenderness  at  the  site  of  the  bursa  and  by 
detecting  a  small  area  of  fluctuation. 

Treatment. — Relax  the  tendon  by  raising  the  heel 
J  in.  Apply,  a  band  of  strapping  round  the  leg  above 
the  malleoli  to  act  like  the  wristlet  worn  by  workmen 
who  have  strained  a  tendon  at  the  wrist.  The  patient 
should  be  instructed  to  walk  a  little  every  day,  but  should 
not  be  allowed  to  do  an  indefinite  amount  of  walk- 
ing ;  this  is  one  of  the  difficulties  connected  with  letting 
soldiers  out  from  hospital  on  pass. 

(c)  Periostitis  at  the  site  of  insertion  of  the  tendon, 
due  to  strain  of  the  insertion. 

The  diagnosis  is  made  by  localizing  the  tenderness 
on  pressure  a  little  lower  down  than  in  the  case  of 
bursitis,  and  by  the  absence  of  deep  fluctuation  in  the 
bursa  beneath  the  tendon.  Treatment  by  rest  is  the  same 
as  for  the  preceding  condition. 

Both  these  last-mentioned  conditions  may  be  present 
simultaneously  and  become  chronic.  The  best  treat- 
ment then  is  first  to  puncture  the  bursa  or  the  inflamed 
area  of  periosteum  several  times  with  a  hot  needle. 
The  process  is  exactly  that  known  to  the  farrier  as 
"  pin-firing."  The  effect  of  this  is  to  excite  an  active 
vascularization  of  the  part,  after  which  repair  takes 
place  more  rapidly  if  the  rest  treatment  is  carried  out. 

Further,  cauterizing  a  patient's  heel  deters  him  from 
wearing  a  boot  and  going  out  for  too  long  walks,  and 
gives  the  deep  lesion  an  opportunity  to  recover  while 
the  surface  blister  is  healing. 

Irregular  fibrous  masses  are  sometimes  noled  in  the 


OSTEITIS   AND   PERIOSTITIS  59 

Achilles  tendon.  These  are  usually  the  result  of  partial 
ruptures,  and  if  large  and  persistently  painful  they 
should  be  removed. 

2.  SPURS  OF  BONE  UNDER  THE  Os  CALCIS 

Spurs  of  bone  running  forward  into  the  plantar  fascia 
or  short  muscles  of  the  sole  are  frequently  seen  in 
skiagrams  (Fig.  60).  They  often  cause  no  symptoms. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  the  patient  accidentally  jumps  on 
to  a  stone  and  bruises  the  periosteum  over  one  of  these 
spurs,  it  may  become  enlarged,  or  an  adventitious  bursa 
may  develop  under  it.  After  this,  the  patient  feels 


Fig.  60. — Spur  of  bone  under  os  calcis. 

pain  every  time  he  puts  his  heel  on  the  ground,  and  it 
becomes  acute  in  the  course  of  a  long  march. 

Treatment. — Make  an  incision  along  the  side  of  the 
foot  and  gouge  away  the  spur  and  tissue  round  it  to 
make  sure  of  clearing  out  the  bursa  and  any  chronically 
inflamed  periosteum.  The  incision  should,  of  course, 
not  be  made  in  the  sole,  as  a  scar  in  these  regions  is 
often  itself  the  cause  of  trouble. 

3.  OSTEITIS  AND  PERIOSTITIS 

Osteitis  and  periostitis  of  the  os  calcis  often  arise  from 
bruising  of  the  bone  by  a  jump  or  fall  from  a  height,  or 
by  injury  due  to  gunshot.  There  may  be  no  gross 
fracture,  only  some  crumpling  of  the  lamellae,  which 
may  be  seen  in  a  good  skiagram.  When  a  fracture 
occurs,  the  disability  is  often  due  to  bony  irregularities 
on  the  under-surface  of  the  bone. 

Treatment  is  often  unsatisfactory,  and  if  the  bony 
masses  are  felt  in  the  sole  under  the  heel  they  should  be 
freely  removed.  Palliative  measures  are  of  no  use  in 
the  case  of  a  soldier  ;  and  one  may  state  as  a  general 
proposition  that  a  soldier  with  a  badly  fractured 
astragalus  or  os  calcis  will  not  again  be  fit  for  service. 


CHAPTER    IV 


MALUNITED   AND    UNUNITED    FRACTURES 

DELAYED  UNION 

THE  conditions  to  which  the  terms  "delayed  union" 
and  "  non-union  "  are  applied  may  be  difficult  to  dis- 
tinguish, becavise  often  we  find  that,  even  after  months, 
osteogenetic  changes  leading  to  consolidation  will 
take  place  in  a  fracture  considered  to 
be  permanently  united.  If  we  are  to 
avoid  disagreeable  experiences,  we  must 
recognize  that  for  various  reasons,  some 
of  which  we  know  and  some  of  which 
are  still  unknown,  a  certain  proportion 
of  fractures  take  longer  to  unite  than 
others.  Some  years  ago  I  was  called  to 
a  distance  to  operate  upon  a  fractured 
femur.  The  accident  had  occurred  three 
months  previously.  The  length  and 
alignment  were  good,  but  the  patient 
had  some  sugar  in  the  urine,  and  we 
decided,  instead  of  operating,  to  place 
the  limb,  free  from  circular  constriction, 
in  a  Thomas's  bed  splint  (Figs.  61,  105, 
106,  107,  109).  Certain  other  procedures 
which  I  advised  were  not  carried  out,  but 
in  four  weeks  very  firm  consolidation  had 
occurred.  This  case  affords  an  example 
of  a  clinical  type.  There  may  be  several 
weeks  of  apparent  inactivity  in  callus 
formation,  and  then  consolidation  occurs 
quite  rapidly.  If  a  practitioner  takes 
care  to  maintain  a  good  length  and  ac- 
curate alignment,  he  should  look  forward 
cheerfully  to  a  happy  issxie  even  if  union 
is  delayed.  As  a  rule,  this  is  exactly 

g'bfspnnl"ass  what  he  does   not  do-     At  the  end  of 
the  fifth  week  he  begins  to  feel  nervous, 

he  disturbs  the  bone  ends,  modifies  his  methods,  and  by 
degree  transforms  into  a  permanent  disability  a  con- 
dition which  merely  demanded  patience. 

Delayed  union  is  most  common  in  the  middle  of  the 
60 


DELAYED   UNION  61 

femur,  in  the  humerus  at  the  junction  of  the  middle  and 
upper  third,  and  in  the  tibia  and  fibula  at  their  lower 
third. 

Causes. — In  many  cases  there  is  an  obvious  reason 
for  the  delayed  union.  Very  often  it  is  not  due  to  mal- 
position ;  it  is,  indeed,  quite  remarkable  how  often  in 
delayed  and  ununited  fractures  the  bones  are  almost 
automatically  opposed.  I  will  not  waste  time  by  doing 
more  than  mention  some  of  the  academic  causes  assigned 
— such  as  tabes,  syphilis,  and  acute  diseases.  I  would 
prefer  to  focus  attention  on  the  more  real  and  prac- 
tical conditions  which  have  a  direct  relation  to  the 
method  of  treatment. 

Circular  Compression. — An  obvious  and  frequent  cause 
is  inefficient  reduction,  and  later  on,  in  considering 
malunion,  I  will  refer  to  this  in  greater  detail.  I  will, 
however,  deal  first  with  another  cause  of  delayed  union — • 
circular  compression  of  the  limb  by  splint  and  bandage. 
A  fundamental  principle  in  the  treatment  of  fractures 
is  to  secure  and  maintain  good  length  and  good  alignment, 
and  in  attaining  these  ends  care  should  be  taken  that 
the  circulation  of  the  limb  shall  be  in  no  way  hampered. 
The  splint  used  should  be  so  constructed  that  after  the 
bandage  is  applied  the  fingers  can  be  readily  introduced 
between  it  and  the  lateral  aspects  of  the  limb.  In  look- 
ing back  upon  the  ununited  fractures  I  have  seen,  I 
generally  recall  an  attenuated  limb  and  a  thick  plaster 
case.  When  the  casing  is  removed  the  blanched  limb 
becomes  red,  and  the  blanched  bone  begins  to  take  its 
fill  of  blood.  It  is  because  plaster  generally  fails  to 
secure  length  and  adequate  blood  supply  that  it  is  a 
prolific  source  of  delayed  union  and  ununited  fracture. 
I  would  not  condemn  the  use  of  plaster  altogether, 
much  as  I  dislike  it,  but  it  should  be  used  with  discri- 
mination. It  should  be  fixed  in  such  a  way  that  the 
limb  remains  in  extension  and  in  good  alignment,  and 
that  the  circulation  of  the  limb  is  in  no  way  hampered. 

Duration  of  Period  of  Consolidation. — Textbooks  have 
led  us  astray  in  regard  to  the  period  required  for  the 
consolidation  of  bone.  Fractured  adult  bones  are  never 
firm  after  four  or  five  weeks,  as  the  books  would  lead 
us  to  infer. 

For  practical  purposes,  ignorance  of  this  fact  may 
make  no  difference  in  the  case  of  the  upper  limb,  but 
in  the  case  of  the  lower  limb,  where  the  effect  of  the  body 
weight  has  to  be  considered,  to  underestimate  the  period 
of  consolidation  is  to  invite  disaster.  * 

Treatment. — If  a  case  of  delayed  union  is  first  seen 
in  the  seventh  or  eighth  week  we  need  do  no  more 
than  make  quite  sure  of  good  alignment,  length,  and 
circulation.  Nature  will  do  the  rest. 


62  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

Percussion  and  Damming. — If  a  long  time  has  elapsed 
the  need  for  action  is  more  pressing,  and  we  must  en- 
deavour to  transform  the  indolent  callus  into  an  osteo- 
genetic  factory,  so  that  bone  may  be  generated.  I 
know  of  no  better  means  than  that  suggested  by  H.  O. 
Thomas,  and  named  by  him  "  percussion  and  dam- 
ming." 

Femur. — As  an  example,  I  will  take  non-union  of 
the  femur  with  shortening  probably  of  two  or  three 
inches.  Under  an  anaesthetic  the  soft  fibrous  callus  is 
broken  down  and  the  fractured  ends  are  turned  towards 
the  skin  and  beaten  with  a  mallet ;  a  pulley  is  then 
applied  to  the  limb,  and  as  much  length  as  possible 
gained.  A  Thomas  knee  splint  is  then  adjusted  and 
the  extension  maintained.  Two  pieces  of  indiarubber 
tubing  are  tied  around  the  limb,  one  three  or  four  inches 


Fig-  62. — "  Damming  "  or  congestive  treatment  of  ununited  fracture 
of  the  humerus  by  Thomas's  method. 

above  the  fracture,  and  the  other  at  an  equal  distance 
below.  They  are  kept  on,  to  begin  with,  for  about 
twenty  minutes  each  day  until  they  can  be  borne  for 
several  hours  at  a  time.  They  should  be  kept  tied 
sufficiently  tightly  to  produce  considerable  swelling  and 
stasis.  Usually  in  two  or  three  weeks  callus  is  thrown 
out,  and  the  osteoblasts  begin  actively  to  produce  bone. 
Local  congestion  between  two  indiarubber  tubes  is  much 
more  effective  than  congestion  by  one  proximal  tube.  I 
can  recall  many  cases  in  which  bones  that  had  remained 
ununited  for  several  months  became  firmly  consolidated 
after  use  of  this  simple  device  (invented  by  Thomas 
and  ascribed  twenty  years  later  to  Bier)  for  stimulating 
osteogenesis.  The  method  of  applying  the  india- 
rubber  tubes  to  produce  congestion  is  shown,  applied 
to  the  humerus,  in  Fig.  62. 

Tibia  and  Fibula. — In  old  ununited  fractures  of  the 
tibia  and  fibula  complete  extension  is  not  so  easily 
attained,  and  it  may  be  necessary  to  remove  bone. 
If  this  be  done,  the  operation  should  be  performed  under 


DELAYED   UNION  63 

pulley  extension  (Fig.  63),  or  by  turning  the  ends  of  the 
bone  out  of  the  wound  and  engaging  the  fragments  in 
shoe-horn  fashion  after  the  method  of  Lane.  If  the 
case  be  suitable  and  the  surgeon  possess  the  mechanical 
skill  subsequently  to  keep  a  good  alignment,  it  is  best 
to  avoid  the  introduction  of  plates  or  screws.  The 
bones  should  be  kept  in  absolutely  good  apposition, 
and  where  it  can  be  easily  accomplished  they  should  be 
wrapped  in  transplanted  fascia,  which  will  act  as  a  bind- 
ing membrane  in  the  same  way  as  periosteum. 

In  another  type  of  case  in  which  the  bone  is  eburnated 
with  feeble  callus  production,  it  is  well  after  sawing  the 
ends  to  crenate  the  edges  with  bone  nibblers,  and  to 
transplant  bone  from  some  other  part  of  the  body.  The 
sides  of  the  fractured  ends  should  be  prepared  to  receive 


Fig.  63. — Pulley  used  in   setting  and  operating  upon  fracture  of  tibia  and 
fibula ;  counter-extension  shown. 

the  transplanted  portion,  which  can  be  affixed  laterally 
(Fig.  64,  A),  or  driven  into  each  end  of  the  medulla. 
The  transplanted  bones  and  the  fractured  ends  are  held 
in  position  with  transplanted  fascia  wrapped  around 
them. 

Figures  65  A  and  65  B  illustrate  a  method  of  sliding  a 
transplant  to  bridge  over  the  fracture.  Albee's  twin 
saw  is  used  to  enable  the  operator  to  detach  with  mathe- 
matical correctness  a  strip  of  bone  partly  above  and 
partly  below  the  line  of  fracture.  A  chisel  is  used  at 
either  end  to  complete  the  detachment.  The  shorter 
detached  piece  (in  the  figure  the  lower)  is  removed  and 
the  larger  piece  is  slid  down  (Fig.  65  B). 

Autogenous  transplantation  of  bone  is  far  more 
effective  than  transplantation  from  another  patient  or 
from  an  animal.  A  bone  graft  without  periosteum  is 
sometimes  as  effective  as  one  taken  with  its  periosteum. 
This  fact  is  important,  for  if  bone  is  removed  from  some 


64  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


other   part  of  the   body   subperiosteally,   the  removed 
bone  is  very  rapidly  replaced  by  new  bone.    Where  con- 
venient, however,  the  periosteum  should  be  retained. 
Non-union  is  very  apt  to  occur  where    a    wide  gap 


Fig.  64. — Bone  grafting.      A,  Lateral  bone  graft  for  fracture.      B,  Lateral 
bone  graft  for  a  case  in  which  bone  has  been  removed. 


exists  between  the  bones.  In  the  case  of  fracture  of  the 
tibia  of  long  standing,  where  the  growth  of  the  fibula 
has  progressed,  I  have  operated  with  success  by  remov- 
ing a  large  lateral  slice  from  the  upper  end  of  the  fractured 
tibia,  and  using  it  as  a  bridge  to  spari  the  gap  (Fig.  64  B). 


MALUNION  65 

Compound  Comminuted  Fractures  :  Retention  of  Frag- 
ments.— This  leads  me  to  speak  of  compound  comminuted 
fractures  associated  with  loose  pieces  of  bone.  The 
removal  of  these  pieces  is  very  frequently  the  cause  of 
non-union.  If  loose  pieces  are  felt,  provided  the  wound  ' 
is  not  suppurating,  they  should  be  scrupulously  saved  ; 
the  pieces,  if  quite  loose,  should  be  taken  out  of  the  wound 
and  laid  in  alcohol,  and  then  carefully  replaced  in 
position  or  round  the  site  of  fracture.  In  such  cases 
I  refrain  from  introducing  any  foreign  bodies,  such  as 
nails,  plates,  or  wires.  If  a  drain  be  used  at  all,  it 
should  be  for  forty-eight  hours  only. 

Weak  Union  :  Exuberant  Callus. — Malunion  of  the 
femur  of  six  or  seven  weeks'  duration  can  almost  always 
be  corrected  by  powerful  manipulation.  The  same  is 
true  of  all  the  long  bones.  At  my  clinic  every  week 
I  am  accustomed,  by  wrench  or  hand,  to  correct  mal- 
united  fractures  of  several  weeks'  standing.  The  method 
is  especially  applicable  to  a  Colles's  or  a  Pott's  fracture. 

Weak  union  can  be  diagnosed  almost  with  certainty 
even  when  ordinary  manipulation  fails  to  detect  it.  It 
is  suggested  by  tenderness  on  pressure  over  the  site  of 
the  old  fracture,  and  confirmed  by  the  additional  sign  of 
exuberant  callus  exudation.  A  malunited  fracture  of 
some  months'  duration,  if  accompanied  by  these  two 
signs,  can  usually  be  corrected  by  forcible  manipulation. 
This  is  a  very  important  clinical  fact  to  remember  from 
the  point  of  view  of  immediate  or  gradual  correction. 

Exuberant  callus  is  sometimes  so  abundant  as  to  be 
mistaken  for  malignant  disease,  and  I  have  met  with 
many  instances  in  which  the  patient  has  narrowly 
escaped  amputation.  This  error  is  more  likely  to  occur 
in  the  femur  than  in  any  other  of  the  long  bones,  especi- 
ally when  the  force  applied  to  produce  it  has  been  so 
slight  as  to  suggest  that  the  fracture  was  spontaneous. 

MALUNION 

Malunion  of  a  fracture  can  always  be  prevented,  and 
should  raise  a  strong  presumption  of  inefficient  treat- 
ment. Our  duty,  therefore,  is  to  examine  the  cause  of 
malunion,  and  to  arm  ourselves  with  a  knowledge  of 
the  weak  points  in  our  method  of  treatment. 

The  causes  of  malunion  may  be  found  (i)  in  errors 
in  the  initial  treatment  or  setting  of  the  fracture, 
(2)  in  errors  in  the  method  of  maintaining  the  fracture 
in  position,  or  (3)  in  errors  of  after-treatment. 

I.    INEFFICIENT    REDUCTION    OF   THE    FRACTURE 

Malunion  of  a  fractured  bone  is  due  to  this  cause 
more  often  than  is  commonly  supposed.  Sometimes  it 

F 


66  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

is  due  to  want  of  knowledge,  but  more  often  to  want  of 
experience  and  confidence. 

It  is  necessary,  of  course,  to  have  a  clear  knowledge 
of  the  anatomical  proportions  of  the  limb  and  of  the 
mechanics  of  its  action  ;  but  it  is  still  more  important 
to  know  the  nature  of  the  impairment  of  function 
likely  to  occur  after  any  particular  fracture,  so  as  to 
be  ready  to  take  means  to  anticipate  and  to  prevent  it. 

Common  causes  of  inefficient  reduction  are — 

(a)  Insufficient  extension  of  the  limb  in  fractures  of 
long  bones — such  as  the  femur  or  humerus — so  that  the 
overriding  of  the  fragments  is  not  completely  corrected. 

(b)  In  Pott's  fracture  there  is  always  an  associated 
dislocation  of  the  ankle  outwards  and  backwards.     If  the 
backward  dislocation  is  not  fully  corrected  there  is  pain 
over  the  front  of  the  ankle  when  the  patient  walks,  and, 
in  addition,  inability  to  dorsiflex  the  ankle,  which  causes 
a  serious  impairment  of  function. 

(c)  In  Colles's  fracture  the  backward  displacement  of 
the  lower  fragment  is  very  serious,  and  is  not  always 
corrected  by  the  orthodox  traditional  "  hand-shaking  " 
method    of    reduction.     The    lower    fragment    carries 
with  it  the  articular  surface  for  the  head  of  the  ulna, 
and  if  this  is  out  of  line  the  upper  and  lower  articulations 
between  the  radius  and  ulna  are  thrown  "  out  of  truth  " 
and  the  radius  will  not  rotate  properly.     This  leads  to 
impairment   of  pronation   and   supination,    and   conse- 
quent very  serious  interference  with  function. 

These  are  merely  instances  of  how  a  want  of  sufficient 
determination  in  reducing  the  initial  deformity  may 
play  an  important  part  in  causing  subsequent  loss  of 
function.  I  have  referred  to  them  because  they  occur 
in  common  fractures,  with  the  treatment  of  which  every- 
body ought  to  be  familiar,  yet  I  see  a  large  number  of 
cases  of  serious  impairment  of  function  really  due  to 
these  causes. 

2.    FIXATION   AFTER    SETTING    OF    FRACTURE 

If  the  fixation  of  the  limb  after  the  fracture  has  been 
reduced  is  inefficient,  so  that  a  material  amount  of  move- 
ment can  take  place  between  the  fragments,  then  every 
such  movement  causes  pain,  and  produces  a  reflex  con- 
traction of  the  muscles.  This  reflex  spasm  may  very 
readily  cause  overriding  of  the  fragments,  and  in  the 
case  of  the  shafts  of  long  bones  lead  to  shortening. 
In  fracture  of  the  neck  of  the  femur  it  modifies  the 
angle  between  the  neck  and  the  shaft  and  so  causes  the 
flexion  of  the  joint,  with  the  result  that  body  weight  is 


MALUNION 


67 


not  transmitted  in  the  normal  line.  In  consequence  of 
this,  crippling  changes  of  an  osteo-arthritic  character 
subsequently  occur  in  the  joint.  Faulty  alignment  of 
the  bones  may  arise  from  inefficient  fixation,  even  in  a 
case  in  which  the  fracture  was  originally  fully  reduced 
and  the  bones  brought  into  correct  alignment  (Fig.  66). 
The  result  is  that  the  true  line  of  the  shaft  of  the  bone  is 


Fig.  65. — End-to-end  apposition   of  fractured  femur.     A,  End-to-end    appo- 
sition and  perfect  alignment.     B,  Imperfect  apposition  but  with  good  align- 
<ment.   c.  End-to-end  apposition  with  faulty  alignment. 

not  maintained,  and  the  joint  at  one  end  of  the  bone  is 
thrown  out  of  its  proper  relation  to  the  joint  at  the  other  ; 
in  consequence,  muscles  do  not  act  in  their  correct  line, 
and  the  usefulness  of  the  limb  is  impaired.  Further,  in 
the  lower  limb  the  line  of  transmission  of  body  weight  is 
altered,  and  this  throws  an  improper  strain  on  joints 
and  ligaments,  resulting  in  changes  in  the  joints,  in  flat- 
foot,  and  in  other  disabling  deformities.  For  instance, 
in  fracture  of  the  tibia  and  fibula  a  little  shortening  of 
the  limb  does  not  seriously  impair  its  strength  if  the 


68  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


alignment  is  good.  A  slight  bow -leg  even  is  not  serious 
(Fig.  67  A),  for  slight  bow-leg  is  a  harmless  type.  Many 
muscular  and  powerful  men  are,  indeed,  slightly  bow- 
legged,  but  in  a  valgoid  deformity  the  weight  of  the  body 
is  carried  too  far  to  the  inner  side  of  the  foot,  and  this 
throws  too  much  weight  on  the  arch,  and  the  result  is 
a  flat  and  everted  foot  (Fig.  67  B). 
»  Any  valgus  deformity  at  the  knee,  in  the  leg,  or  at  the 


\ 


Fig.  67. — Diagrams  to  illustrate  effects  of  malunion  of  tibia.     A,    Malonited 

fracture  of  tibia  producing  bow-leg  and   throwing  body  weight  on  to  outer 

side  of  font.     B,  M alunited  fracture  of  tibia  in  such  a  position  that  the  weight 

of  the  body  is  carried  to  the  inner  side  of  the  foot,  producing  flat-foot. 

ankle  is  a  weakening  deformity,  and  greatly  reduces 
the  usefulness  of  the  limb.  It  is  a  good  fault,  therefore, 
to  err  on  the  side  of  producing  a  slight  bow-leg,  with 
its  varoid  accompaniment,  if  there  is  to  be  any  error  at 
all.  In  cases  of  malunion,  when  the  callus  is  still  tender, 
it  is  generally  not  difficult  to  readjust  the  limb  by 
manipulation  without  having  to  perform  an  open 
operation.  In  the  case  of  the  femur,  this  can  usually  be 
done  two,  or  even  three,  months  after  the  original  frac- 
ture. As  a  rule,  the  worse  the  position  of  the  bones  the 
longer  will  the  callus  take  to  consolidate. 


MALUNION 


69 


The  next  point  to  which  I  would  draw  attention  is 
that  callus  may  yield  in  such  a  way  as  to  throw  the  bone 
out  of  proper  alignment.  A  good  example  of  this  is  fre- 
quently afforded  by  cases  of  Pott's  fracture  which  have 
been  correctly  reduced,  and  six  weeks  later  are  in  good 
position  and  united.  A  month  after  this,  however,  the 
patient  may  complain  of  some  pain  at  the  site  of  the 
fracture,  and  also  of  symptoms  of  flat-foot. 

Here  the  counter-pressure  of  the  ground  on  the  foot 
forces  the  astragalus  against  the  external  malleolus,  and 


Fig.  68. — Boot  and  iron  for 
use  after  Pott's  fracture.  A, 
Showing  the  boot  with 
crooked  and  elongated  heel 
and  the  outside  iron  ;  B,  the 
same  applied. 


so  produces  a  lever  action,  straining  the  callus.  To 
avoid  this,  every  case  of  Pott's  fracture  should  be  set  to 
walk  with  the  inner  side  of  the  heel  raised  to  keep  the 
foot  inverted,  and  if  the  patient  is  a  heavy  subject  an 
outside  brace  also  should  be  worn  (Fig.  68  A  and  68  B). 
It  is  disconcerting  and  puzzling  to  see  a  perfectly  good 
functional  result  replaced  by  a  bad  one ;  to  avoid  dis- 
appointment of  this  kind  it  is  advisable,  particularly  in 
fractures  of  the  lower  limb,  to  apply  some  sort  of  guard 
to  prevent  straining  of  the  callus. 

Functional  Impairment  associated  with  Various 
Fractures.  —  Before  discussing  the  treatment  to  be 
adopted  in  particular  cases,  it  is  well  to  recognize  the 
forms  of  impairment  of  function  commonly  associated 
with  each  fracture. 


70  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

Humerus.  —  Fractures  of  'the  humerus  near  the 
shoulder-joint  (that  is,  those  of  the  surgical  neck  and 
above  the  insertion  of  the  deltoid)  are  commonly  associ- 
ated with  inability  to  abduct  the  limb  fully.  The  reason 
is  that  the  upper  fragment  is  often  tilted  outwards, 
and  end-to-end  union  does  not  take  place.  In  order  to 
avoid  this,  the  surgeon's  object  when  setting  the  fracture 
should  be  to  bring  the  fragments  end  to  end  if  possible. 
He  should  pull  the  arm  at  right  angles  to  the  trunk,  or 
even  straight  upwards,  until  all  overriding  is  completely 
overcome,  and  should  then  endeavour  to  engage  the  end 
of  the  lower  fragment  on  the  broken  end  of  the  upper 
fragment.  By  pressing  the  two  together  he  can  at  once 
tell  if  they  are  engaged  or  are  sliding  past  each  other. 
If  they  are  engaged,  the  arm  can  be  gently  brought 
down  to  the  side  and  secured  to  the  trunk  by  bandages. 


Fi<.  69. —  Position  for  fractures  about  elbow  in  the  adult.     The  elbow  is  even 
more  flexed  in  children. 

Once  the  fragments  are  engaged  they  are  not  likely  to 
become  disengaged  again. 

Elbow-joint. — In  fractures  about  the  elbow- joint,  with 
the  single  exception  of  fracture  of  the  olecranon  process, 
the  usual  disability  is  limitation  of  flexion. 

The  limb  should  therefore  be  extended  to  push  away 
any  fragment  likely  to  obstruct  extension  afterwards. 
The  forearm  should  be  supinated  to  make  sure  of  clearing 
a  right  of  way  in  that  direction,  and  then  the  elbow 
should  be  fully  flexed  and  bandaged  (Fig.  69),  care  being 
taken  not  to  produce  tight  circular  constriction  of  the 
limb  in  any  part.  In  this  way  we  may  make  sure  that 
there  shall  be  no  callus  exudate  in  the  bend  of  the  elbow 
and  at  the  same  time  the  tendon  of  the  triceps  acts  as 
a  posterior  splint. 

When  a  stiff  elbow,  after  an  injury,  has  to  be  dealt  with, 
the  same  manoeuvres  are  gone  through  so  as  to  force  the 
recently  formed  callus  out  of  the  way  until  full  flexion  is 
secured.  Usually  this  can  be  done  on  one  occasion, 
but  in  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary  to  flex  the  joint 
in  two  or  three  stages. 


FRACTURES:  IMPAIRED  FUNCTION     71 


Radius  and  Ulna. — In  fractures  of  the  bones  of  the 
forearm  the  disability  most  to  be  feared  is  obstruction 
to  supination  ;  pronation  is  usually  good.  Therefore, 
in  setting  the  fracture,  or  when  breaking  down  callus 
and  resetting  the  fracture,  the  surgeon  should  extend 
the  forearm  and  supinate  fully  in  order 
to  make  sure  of  a  clear  right  of  way 
for  supination,  and  then  set  the  frac- 
ture, taking  great  care  that  the  ulna  is 
perfectly  straight,  and  that  there  is  no 
lateral  pressure  anywhere  on  the  shaft 
of  the  radius  (Fig.  70).  It  must,  how- 
ever, be  remembered  that  the  radius  is 
a  curved  bone  which  rotates  on  the 
ulna  like  the  handle  of  a  bucket ;  if 
the  arched  shape  of  the  radius  is  de- 
stroyed the  joints  at  its  ends  will  be 
out  of  their  true  line,  and  impairment 
of  function  will  be  the  result. 

Carpus.  —  Fractures  of  the  carpus 
often  result  in  a  stiff  wrist  in  a  flexed 
position.  Every  schoolboy  knows  that 
the  grasp  of  the  hand  is  weakest  when 
the  wrist  is  flexed.  Therefore,  in  every 
case  of  fracture  or  injury  of  the  carpus, 
the  wrist  should  be  put  up  in  a  hyper- 
extended  position  (Fig.  71). 

If  the  wrist  has  been  allowed  to  get 
stiff  in  a  flexed  position,  it  should  be 
dorsiflexed  under  an  anaesthetic  and 
fixed  in  that  position.  In  rare  instances 
a  fragment  of  the  scaphoid  is  displaced 
on  to  the  dorsum  and  blocks  extension  ; 
if  this  has  occurred,  it  may  be  necessary 
to  remove  the  fragment  before  the  wrist  sary .'."  fr«ctures  of 

radiu*  and  ulna. 

can  be  hyperextended. 

Ankle-joint. — When  we  turn  to  fractures  near  the 
ankle-joint  we  find  that  many  patients  complain  of  both' 
pain  and  stiffness  which  last  for  months  or  years.  A 
study  of  the  causes  brings  to  light  two  principal  factors 


70.— To  show 
the  complete  supin- 
ation and  extension 
of  the  arm  neces- 


Fi<.  71. — DorsiBcxion  of  wrist  for  fracture  of  carpus. 

responsible  for  loss  of  function  here.  Eversion  of  the 
foot,  for  instance,  is  fairly  well  recognized  as  one  of  them 
(Fig.  72).  If  the  patient  is  allowed  to  recover  with  the 
ankle  in  a  valgus  position,  the  body  weight  when  he 


72  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

stands  will  fall  too  far  to  the  inner  side  of  the  foot,  and 
at  once  all  the  factors  which  make  for  the  production  of 
flat-foot  are  produced.  It  is,  however,  not  sufficiently 
well  recognized  that  these  conditions  may  be  at  work 
in  an  ankle  which  has  every  appearance  of  being  in  good 
position  when  the  patient  is  discharged  from  hospital. 
Straining  of  young  callus  by  body  weight  is  very  common 
in  fractures  around  the  ankle-joint,  owing  to  the  patient 
being  allowed  to  walk  on  the  unprotected  joint  too  early. 
I  therefore  always  discharge  these  patients  with  a 
"  crooked  "  heel  and  often  with  an  outside  brace  as 
well,  to  ensure  that  the  body  weight  shall  fall  on  the 
outer  side  of  the  foot  (Figs.  68  A  and  683).  The  natural 
corollary  of  this  is  that  if  body  weight  will  produce 
a  valgus  deformity  by  straining  the  callus,  it  will  also 


Fig.  72.— Malunited  Pott's  fracture,  showing  eversion  of  foot. 

correct  it  if  we  "crook"  the  boot  well,  and  therefore 
when  the  callus  is  already  strained  in  the  valgus  direc- 
tion, and  the  patient  comes  with  a  stiff  painful  ankle 
and  foot,  all  we  need  do  in  many  of  the  milder  cases  is 
to  crook  the  boot  well  on  the  inner  side,  and  let  the 
patient  "  walk  out  "  his  deformity.  In  older  and  more 
severe  cases  it  is  from  the  first  necessary  or  advisable 
to  wrench  the  foot  into  an  inverted  position  under  an 
anaesthetic,  and  then  let  him  walk  with  his  heel  well 
crooked  ;  this  is  made  easier  by  the  application  of  an 
outside  brace  (Fig.  68).  If  this  after-treatment  is  not 
persisted  in  for  some  weeks  the  condition  will  most 
likely  recur. 

The  second  great  disability,  after  injuries  about  the 
ankle-joint,  is  inability  to  dorsiflex  the  ankle.  The 
patient,  when  walking,  cannot  get  forward  on  to  the 
toes  and  fore  part  of  the  toes  without  pain  across  the 
front  of  1fhe  ankle. 

This  is  a  very  difficult  condition  to  correct,  once  the 


POTT  S   FRACTURE 


73 


deformity  has  been  allowed  to  become  established.  The 
proper  thing  is  to  prevent  it  when  the  injury  is  recent  ; 
to  make  sure  of  this  the  surgeon  should  dorsiflex  the 
foot  and  so  satisfy  himself  that  he  has  commanded  a 
complete  and  clear  right  of  way  for  this  movement  in 
the  future. 

Both  these  disabilities  are  well  illustrated  by  cases 
of  Pott's  fracture  :  this  injury  essentially  consists  of  a 
fracture  of  the  fibula  about  three  or  four  inches  above 
the  external  malleolus  with  a  dislocation  of  the  ankle 
outwards  and  backwards  (Fig.  73).  There  may  be  minor 
complications,  such  as  fracture  of  the  tip  of  the  internal 
malleolus  or  the  less  well  recognized  fracture  of  the  edge 
of  the  articular  surface  of  the  tibia.  These,  however, 
do  not  alter  the  general  nature  of  the  disability. 


Fig.  73. — Malanited  Pott's  fracture,  showing  dislocation  backwards 
of  the  foot. 

The  method  of  reduction  I  adopt  is  the  following  : 
The  knee  is  flexed  to  relax  the  calf  muscles.  If  these 
muscles  give  trouble,  tenotomy  of  the  Achilles  tendon 
will  put  them  out  of  action,  but  this  is  only  necessary  in 
exceptional  cases,  and  strength  returns  but  slowly  after 
this  apparently  harmless  operation.  Grasping  the  foot 
by  the  heel  in  one  hand  and  the  dorsum  in  the.  other, 
the  foot  is  pulled  and  everted  to  make  sure  of  thoroughly 
disentangling  the  fractured  ends.  While  still  pulling, 
the  foot  is  fully  inverted  and  the  ankle  dorsiflexed. 
If  the  ankle  cannot  be  dorsiflexed  fully,  it  means  that 
there  is  a  definite  posterior  dislocation  or  that  the  an- 
terior edge  of  the  tibia  is  fractured.  It  is  necessary 
then  to  push  the  tibia  back  and  bring  the  foot  well 
forward  until  the  ankle  can  be  well  dorsiflexed.  The 
foot  is  then  fixed  in  splints  in  the  fully  inverted  position 
and  dorsiflexed  a  little  beyond  the  right  angle.  If  the 
surgeon  maintains  it  in  this  position,  he  may  wait  with 
confidence  for  a  good  result.  If  he  is  content  with  a  less 


74  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

thorough  reposition,  he  is  in  great  danger  of  getting 
a  result  with  some  stiffness,  pain,  or  limitation  of 
movement  which  will  seriously  interfere  with  comfort 
in  walking.  Since  the  days  of  Percival  Pott  many 
splints  have  been  devised.  The  shape  and  style  of  the 
splint  does  not  matter  a  jot.  The  important  element 
is  the  surgeon.  If  he  knows  his  work,  he  will  fix  the 
foot  in  the  position  described  and  will  be  rewarded  by 
a  good  result. 

As  we  have  seen,  malunion  and  consequent  functional 
disability  depend  on  two  factors  :  (a)  eversion,  (b) 
diminished  dorsiflexion. 

(a)  Eversion  often  calls  for  operation.  In  compara- 
tively simple  cases  all  that  is  needed  is  to  pass  a  chisel 
through  the  internal  malleolus,  and  also  through  the  site 


Fig.  74. — Operation  for  malunited  Pott's  fracture  ;  wedge  from 
tibia  and  osteotomy  of  fibula. 

of  the  old  fibular  fracture.  The  foot  should  then  be 
forcibly  inverted,  and  treatment  continued  to  maintain 
the  inversion.  In  the  more  severe  type  of  case  an  open 
operation  is  advisable.  A  wedge  of  bone  is  removed 
from  the  lower  end  and  inner  side  of  the  tibia  (Fig.  74). 
The  wedge  should  only  go  a  distance  of  four-fifths 
through  the  bone.  An  osteotomy  of  the  fibula  is  next 
performed.  The  wounds  are  closed,  and  not  dressed 
for  twelve  or  fourteen  days.  The  stitches  are  then 
removed,  and,  under  gas,  the  limb  is  fractured  by 
forcible  inversion.  This  two-stage  operation  eliminates 
the  anxiety  which  must  attend  the  treatment  of  a  com- 
pound fracture,  and  this  is  an  important  matter  when 
powerful  manipulation  is  necessary.  For  many  reasons, 
however,  it  may  be  advisable  to  complete  the  reduction 
at  the  time  of  operation. 

(b)  Dorsiflexion    of    the    ankle    may  be   blocked    by 
callus   exudate  the  result  of  fracture  of  the  anterior 


FRACTURES   OF    FEMUR 


75 


articular  edge  of  the  tibia.  Complete  dorsiflexion  ot 
the  ankle  at  the  time  of  accident  would  save  the  pa- 
tient from  this  deformity,  for  the  fragment  of  bone 
would  in  this  way  be  pushed  to  one  side,  but  if  this  has 
not  been  done,  and  at  a  later  date  we  find  that  dorsi- 
flexion is  prevented,  an  incision  should  be  made  and  the 
offending  prominence  chiselled  away.  The  space  left 
by  the  removal  of  bone  should  be  packed  with  fat  re- 
moved from  any  convenient  part.  This  prevents  the 
new  callus  exudate  from  giving  rise  to  trouble.  In  all 
operations  where  bone  is  removed 
and  pseudarthrosis  is  desired  I  find 
the  generous  employment  of  fat  most 
helpful,  and  in  order  to  reduce  the 
callus  exudation  the  exposed  cancel- 
lous  bone  should  be  lightly  hammered. 

Tibia. — In  fracture  of  the  tibia 
faulty  alignment  may  be  brought 
about  by  posterior  bowing  ;  the 
weight  of  the  body  may  be  thrown 
so  far  back  that  it  passes  at  some 
distance  behind  the  ankle,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  75. 

Femur. — Fractures  of  the  neck  of 
the  femur,  and  all  fractures  about  the 
small  trochanter,  should  be  treated 
in  the  abducted  position  to  prevent 
deformity  of  the  coxa  vara  type 
(Fig.  76  A  and  763).  Stiffness  of  the 
hip  associated  with  limitation 
of  abduction,  often  accom- 
panied by  "  osteo-arthritic  " 
changes  in  the  hip-joint,  is 
the  sequel  of  malunion  in 
this  region.  To  prevent  this  it  is 
necessary  to  secure  abduction  and  to 
maintain  extension  in  the  abducted 
position.  If  the  fracture  is  of  some 
weeks'  standing  and  the  area  is  still  tender,  the  callus 
is  certainly  not  consolidated ;  forcible  abduction  and 
extension  in  an  abduction  frame  and  rigid  fixation  in 
this  position  will  then  be  followed  by  adaptation  of 
the  callus  to  the  corrected  position. 

Fractures  of  the  shaft  of  the  femur,  especially  in  the 
middle  third,  are  frequently  followed  by  gross  forms  of 
malunion,  which  will  excellently  serve  to  illustrate 
malunion  in  long  bones. 

The  faults  commonly  found  are  : 

i.  Shortening  or  overriding,  due  to  the  fact  that  (a)  re- 
duction has  been  incomplete,  the  surgeon  not  having 
pulled  until  the  fractured  limb  was  at  least  as  long  as 


Fig.  75.  —  Diagram  to 
illustrate  position  of  leg 
and  foot  in  posterior 
bowing  of  fractured 
tibia. 


76  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


its  fellow  ;  (b)  the  method. of  fixation  and  extension  used 
has  been  inefficient,  and  the  muscles  have  caused  over- 
riding after  the  fracture  was  set  ;  (c)  the  body  weight 


Fig.  76. — Fracture  of  neck  of  femur.    A,  Fractured  neck,  showing  position 
in  adduction.     ';,  Fractured  neck  correctly  reduced  in  abduction. 

has  caused  yielding  of  the  callus  after  the  patient  has 
begun  to  walk. 

2.  Angular  deformity  or  erroneous  alignment  is  the 
result  of  inefficient  methods  of  fixation,  and  more  par- 
ticularly of  inefficient  extension  in  the  line  of  the  limb. 
Erroneous  alignment  throws  all  the  muscles  of  the  part 


Fig.  77. — Fracture  of  upper  third  of  femur.      A,  Adduction  deformity, 
n.  Abduction  faulty,  as  the  upper  fragment  does  not  participate. 

out  of  line,  and,  what  is  more  important,  puts  the  joints 
above  and  below  out  of  their  correct  relations.  A  com- 
mon fault  in  fractures  at  the  junction  of  the  lower  and 
middle  third  is  a  posterior  sagging  (Fig.  78),  which  is 


FRACTURES   OF   FEMUR 


77 


best  seen  when  the  patient  begins  to  walk.  The  body 
weight  is  thus  thrown  on  the  posterior  part  of  the  cap- 
sule. The  deformity  resembles  a  genu  recurvatum. 

3.  Rotation  deformity  is  far  too  common,  and  can  only 
be  the  result  of  careless  and  inefficient  treatment. 

Diagnosis. — In  a  case  of  malunion  of  the  shaft  of  the 
femur  in  which  one  or  more  of  these  elements  are  present 
the  whole  region  of  the  fracture  is  tender,  and  is  also 
the  seat  of  pain  for  weeks  and 
months  after  consolidation  ought 
to  be  complete.  This  means  that 
consolidation  is  far  from  complete, 
and  that  the  callus  is  the  seat  of 
active  change.  Nature,  in  fact,  is 
struggling  with  the  problem  of 
buttressing  up  the  malunited  frag- 
ments so  that  they  can  meet  the 
forces  which  are  acting  in  them  : 
hence  the  exuberant  production  of 
callus,  which  is  attended  by  pain 
and  tenderness. 

Treatment. — In  such  cases  it  is 
not  difficult  to  break  down  the 
callus  by  manipulation.  Exten- 
sion with  block  pulley  and  suitable 
tackle  will  then  stretch  the  muscles 
and  reduce  the  overriding  by  2  J  in. 
on  a  single  occasion  (Fig.  63). 
Rotation  deformity  is,  of  course, 
corrected  at  the  same  time. 

If  open  operation  is  employed, 
the  simplest  form  of  osteotomy  is 
an  oblique  one  through  the  callus 
between  the  original  fragments  of 
the  shaft.  Once  these  are  cut 
through,  the  greatest  part  of  the 
remaining  difficulty  is  in  fully  re- 
storing the  length  of  the  limb  by 
extension.  The  big  muscles  of  the 
thigh  can  only  be  fully  over- 
powered by  the  use  of  block  pulley  trate 

and  tackle  (Fig.   63).     When  this   r 
has  been  accomplished  the  leg  is 

fixed  in  a  Thomas's  knee  splint,  the  tuber  ischii  rests  on 
the  padded  ring,  the  extension  straps  are  secured  to  the 
bottom  of  the  splint.  We  are  then  sure  that,  whatever 
happens,  the  muscles  cannot  contract  and  cause  further 
overriding.  The  only  thing  the  muscles  can  do  is  to 
give  up  the  struggle,  and,  as  a  matter  of  experience, 
this  is  what  always  happens.  The  surgeon  finds  on  his 
next  visit  that  he  can  get  perhaps  another  half-inch  of 


Fig.  78. —  Diagram  to  illus- 
posterior   sagging   in 


7§  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

lengthening  by  further  extension  on  the  straps.  Further, 
in  a  Thomas's  knee  splint  good  general  alignment  of  the 
limb  can  easily  be  secured — in  fact,  is  obtained  almost 
automatically.  The  only  points  to  which  the  surgeon 
has  really  to  attend  are  the  position  of  the  foot — to  see 
that  there  is  no  outward  rotation — and  to  keep  up  firm 
extension. 

Locally,  splints  are  applied  to  control  lateral  move- 
ments. In  the  first  instance  this  is  not  difficult.  When 
resetting  a  malunited  fracture  it  is  not  so  easy,  for  the 
callus  already  formed  gets  in  the  way. 

In  these  malunited  fractures  of  the  femur  of  some 
weeks'  standing  with  considerable  overlapping,  after 
refracturing  the  bone  by  force  the  pulleys  should  always 
be  applied  and  a  great  effort  made  to  secure  both  length 
and  alignment.  To  render  this  less  difficult,  it  may  be 
wise  to  move  the  fractured  ends  freely  in  all  directions 
to  disturb  and  disengage  the  fibrous  and  bony  exudate. 
The  extension  by  pulley  should  be  maintained  for 
several  minutes  to  lessen  the  resiliency  of  structure  and 
to  reduce  the  chance  of  telescoping.  The  limb  is  then 
maintained  in  extension  by  a  Thomas's  splint,  and  on 
two  or  three  subsequent  occasions  the  pulleys  are  applied. 
By  these  simple  means  overlapping  of  three  or  four  inches 
can  be  overcome,  and  an  open  operation  is  avoided. 
The  "  damming  "  method  already  described  is  applied  to 
assist  osteogenesis,  aided  when  necessary  by  percussion. 

Whatever  operation  may  subsequently  be  needed,  I 
cannot  too  strongly  urge  the  necessity  of  preliminary 
pulley  traction  in  order  to  secure  a  better  length,  and  in 
this  way  prevent  the  sacrifice  of  bone. 

In  cases  in  which  union  in  the  vicious  position  is  so 
complete  and  firm  as  to  render  operative  procedures 
necessary,  the  procedure  to  be  followed  is  influenced  by 
the  special  type  of  union  present.  If  it  is  a  mere  case  of 
faulty  alignment,  with  fair  apposition,  a  small  puncture 
and  an  osteotomy  saw  (Fig.  79)  will  do  what  is  desired. 
An  X-ray  photograph  should  be  taken,  and  the  section 
made  through  the  angle.  The  case  is  then  treated  as 
one  of  simple  fracture.  If  there  is  overlapping  of  the 
fragments,  with  no  excessive  callus,  the  saw  or  chisel 
(Fig.  80)  is  introduced  between  the  fragments  and  the 
lateral  fixation  undone.  Pulley  extension  will  then 
diminish  or  obliterate  the  shortening,  and  the  subsequent 
treatment  will  maintain  both  length  and  alignment. 
In  other  fractures  higher  up,  with  great  thickening  and 
lateral  deflexion,  a  wedge  is  removed  from  the  convex 
side  of  the  bent  bone,  and  a  fracture  at  the  point  pre- 
ferred may  be  produced  some  days  later  (Fig.  81).  Ex- 
tension and  abduction  of  the  limb  should  then  be  secured. 
In  rarer  instances,  when  unusual  deformity  and  over- 


FRACTURES  79 

lapping  have  occurred,  it  may  be  necessary  to  explore 
the  fracture  by  a  free  exposure,  to  separate  the  frag- 
ments, to  remove  bone,  and  to  plate. 

CONCLUSION 

It  may  appear  that  in  this  chapter  I  have  dealt  more 
with  the  treatment  of  fractures  than  with  the  treatment 


Fig.  79. — Author's  osteotomy  saw  with  protected  end. 

of  malunited  fractures,  but  a  moment's  reflection  will 
satisfy  us  that  there  is  only  one  problem  before  us — the 
restoration  of  function.  Operation  or  manipulation  to 
free  the  ends  of  the  bones  when  union  ha§  occurred  in  a 
faulty  position  is  only  a  preliminary  step.  In  short,  a 
malunited  fracture  cannot  be  cured  by  operation — all 
the  operation  can  do  is  to  reconstitute  the  fracture  or 
make  another  fracture  similar  to  the  first. 


Fig.  80.— Fracture  of  upper  third 

of  femur.     Diagram  to  illustrate 

osteotomy    to    correct    common 

deformity. 


Fig.  81. — Fracture  of  upper  third  of 
femur-     Diagram   showing   removal 
of   wedge    of   bone  to    correct    ad- 
duction. 


If  after  this  the  subsequent  treatment  is  not  better 
than  the  treatment  adopted  in  the  first  instance,  an  im- 
provement in  the  result  is  not  to  be  expected.  This  is 
probably  why  the  statistics  of  late  operations  to  correct 
malunion  are  often  disappointing.  The  surgeon  must 
not  merely  reduce  the  fracture,  but  must  maintain  the 
corrected  alignment  until  consolidation  of  the  bone  is 
secured. 

The  fundamental  principles  applicable  to  simple  frac- 
tures hold  good  in  the  case  of  compound  fractures. 


8o  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

The  difficulties  in  carrying  them  out  are  obviously 
materially  increased.  Once,  however,  serious  compli- 
cations are  past,  there  will  be  ample  time  and  oppor- 
tunity to  correct  faulty  alignment  and  to  restore  the 
best  possible  function  to  the  fractured  limb. 

The  fractures  met  with  as  a  result  of  gunshot  wounds 
are  usually  very  serious,  and  I  have  witnessed  with  pride 
the  splendid  efforts  made  by  the  young  surgeons  in 
France  to  save  these  mangled  limbs.  Sometimes  we 
hear  criticisms  at  home,  not  always  kindly,  sometimes 
very  unjust,  because  amputations  are  performed  without 
flaps,  and  limbs  still  suppurating  are  not  in  the  best 
position.  If  the  whole  truth  were  known,  these  mangled 
limbs  and  napless  amputations  often  represent  surgical 
triumphs  where  every  art  and  device  has  been  concen- 
trated upon  the  salvation  of  life  and  limb. 


CHAPTER  V 

TRANSPLANTATION  OF  BONE,  AND  SOME 
USES  OF  THE  BONE  GRAFT 

INJURIES  inflicted  by  modern  instruments  of  warfare  are 
so  often  associated  with  loss  of  considerable  portions  of 
bone  that  it  is  necessary  to  bring  together  various 
known  means  of  replacing  these  defects.  The  present 
chapter  aims  at  giving  a  brief  account  of  my  experience 
of  the  grafting  of  bone. 

Clinical  experience  in  recent  years  justifies  the  ex- 
pectation that  a  bone  graft  will  grow  and  fulfil  the  pur- 
pose desired  by  the  surgeon  if  the  operative  technique 
is  appropriate  and  scrupulous  attention  is  paid  to 
asepsis.  Before  dealing  with  the  practical  difficulties  to 
be  encountered,  brief  reference  must  be  made  to  various 
theories  which  have  been  advanced  concerning  the 
growth  of  transplanted  bone. 

Three  of  the  theories  may  be  mentioned  : 

One,  which  has  been  widely  held  in  Europe,  is  that, 
when  a  bone  graft  is  transplanted,  the  grafted  bone 
always  dies  and  is  absorbed,  and  that  any  new  bone 
formed  in  its  place  is  laid  down  by  the  periosteum, 
which  is  the  only  part  of  the  graft  which  really  survives. 

The  second  is  the  well-known  view  of  Macewen  that 
the  new  bone  is  formed  by  the  proliferation  of  osteoblasts 
within  the  bone  itself,  and  is  quite  independent  of  the 
periosteum,  which  is  only  a  limiting  membrane. 

The  third  theory  is  that  the  graft  is  not  osteogenetic, 
but  merely  acts  as  a  suitable  and  appropriate  scaffolding 
along  and  through  which  new  capillaries  and  granulation 
tissue  can  grow,  taking  with  them  osteogenetic  cells 
from  the  living  bone-ends,  between  which  the  graft  is 
placed. 

Recent  investigations  definitely  prove  that  bone  trans- 
planted even  into  the  abdominal  wall  may  grow,  and 
that  this  may  happen  whether  periosteum  alone  or  bone 
alone  is  transplanted. 

McWilliams  of    New  York,  whose  investigations  are 

thorough,    concludes    that    the    survival    of    the    graft 

depends  on    the    establishment    of    an    efficient   blood 

supply,  and  that  the  blood  supply  is  more  quickly  and 

G  81 


82  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

efficiently  established  when  periosteum  is  transplanted 
with  the  grafted  bone. 

I  advise  that,  whenever  possible,  it  is  best  to  transplant 
periosteum  with  the  bone,  and,  further,  to  be  sure  that 
the  graft  should  also  contain  part  of  the  endosteum. 

Every  surgeon  knows  that  in  simple  comminuted 
fractures  portions  of  bone  must  often  be  entirely,  or 
almost  entirely,  cut  off  from  their  usual  blood  supply, 
but  that  necrosis  of  these  fragments  is  extremely  rare, 
while  in  the  presence  of  toxins  of  bacteria,  as  in  septic 
compound  fractures,  more  or  less  necrosis  is  very  prone 
to  occur  even  in  portions  of  bone  still  connected  with 
their  blood  supply. 

It  is  therefore  safe  to  conclude  that,  whether  the 
osteogenetic  cells  are  derived  from  periosteum  or  from 
bone,  scrupuloxis  asepsis  is  essential  to  their  welfare  ; 
that  if  they  are  not  poisoned  by  septic  toxins  they  can 
survive  on  exuded  lymph  or  plasma  for  a  reasonable 
period  while  a  new  blood  supply  is  being  established  ; 
and  further,  that  the  open  cancellous  medullary  aspect 
of  the  bone  and  the  periosteum  both  furnish  convenient 
means  of  access  for  the  new  blood  supply,  and  should 
be  retained  in  the  graft  whenever  it  is  possible. 

It  is  important  to  remember  certain  further  facts, 
which  are  established  beyond  doubt.  First,  that  bone 
taken  from  one  of  the  lower  animals  and  grafted  into 
man  very  rarely  lives,  even  with  the  most  careful  tech- 
nique. Secondly,  that  bone  transplanted  from  one 
individual  to  another  only  lives  in  exceptional  cases. 
These,  therefore,  are  methods  which  cannot  be  recom- 
mended. Finally,  it  is  established  that  autogenous 
transplantation  of  a  portion  of  the  patient's  own  bone 
from  one  part  of  the  body  to  another  is  fairly  con- 
stantly successful  if  the  conditions  are  suitable  and 
the  technique  correct.  The  nature  of  the  technique 
and  the  conditions  found  suitable  will  appear  in  the 
subsequent  parts  of  this  chapter. 

Professor  Tamer's  experiences  in  relation  to  the  trans- 
plantation of  ovaries  are  interesting  and  instructive. 
He  found  that  when  ovaries  were  removed  it  was  pos- 
sible to  retain  the  internal  secretory  influence  of  the 
ovary  by  implanting  a  healthy  portion  of  one  ovary  in 
the  abdominal  wall.  If  the  patient's  own  ovary  was 
employed  it  almost  invariably  survived  and  became 
tender  at  each  subsequent  monthly  period.  In  cases 
in  which  no  part  of  the  patient's  ovaries  could  be  used, 
he  tried  borrowing  an  ovary  from  another  woman  on 
whom  ovariotomy  had  to  be  performed.  In  every 
case  this  transplantation  from  one  individual  to  another 
failed. 

There  are  other  facts  which  should  be  kept  in  mind 


TRANSPLANTATION  OF   BONE        83 

when  repairing  bony  defects.  For  example,  if  a  bridge 
of  periosteum  can  be  preserved,  osteogenesis,  or  new  bone 
formation,  is  much  more  likely  to  occur,  and  the  gap  will 
be  filled  with  greater  rapidity  than  when  no  bridge  is 
possible.  Stiles's  cases  of  subperiosteal  resection  for 
tubercle  are  evidence  of  this. 

Since  the  survival  of  implanted  bone  is  dependent  on 
the  establishment  of  circulation  within  it,  it  follows  that 
necrosis  is  less  likely  to  occur  in  small  fragments  than  in 
large  pieces,  when  the  periosteum  cannot  be  preserved. 
It  is  therefore  a  good  practice  to  scatter  small  fragments 
of  bone  along  the  site  of  the  defect,  for  the  cells  in  them 
can  live  for  some  time  on  exuded  plasma  ;  the  new  blood 
supply  will  reach  them  in  a  few  days. 

GENERAL  CONSIDERATIONS  AS  TO  TRANSPLANTATION 
OF  BONE 

In  performing  transplantation  of  bone  to  replace  a 
defect  in  the  continuity  of  a  long  bone  the  surgeon  has  to 
keep  certain  points  in  view,  and  in  all  must  follow 
Nature's  rules. 

i.  Nutrition  of  the  Graft. — In  order  to  ensure  the 
nutrition  of  the  graft  it  is  essential  to  observe  the  fol- 
lowing points  : — 

(a)  Perfect  hcemostasis  in  the  bed  in  which  the 
graft  is  to  be  laid.     A  mass  of  blood  clot  round  the 
graft  endangers  its  life,  for  this  blood  clot  must  first 
be  "  organized  "  before  the  new  capillaries  or  granu- 
lations can  reach  or  grow  into  the  bone  graft  to 
supply  it  with  blood. 

(b)  Perfect   asepsis,   for   toxins,   if   virulent,   will 
almost  certainly  cause  the  death  of  the  bone  cells 
in  the  graft  before  a  protective  vascularization  can 
occur. 

(c)  Preparation  of  the  bed  in  which  the  graft  is 
to    lie.     It    should    be    freshened,    so    that    rapid 
adhesion  and  organization  may  take  place  between 
the  graft  and   surrounding  tissue.     Moreover,  the 
soft  tissues  should  be  brought  round  the  implanted 
bone. 

2.  Union  of  the  Graft. — The  union  of  the  graft  with 
the  ends  of  the  bones  between  which  it  is  placed  can 
be  helped  in  a  number  of  ways.  The  ends  of  the  bone 
should  be  opened  up  and  prepared  for  the  reception  of 
the  ends  of  the  graft.  It  is  desirable  that  some  part  of 
the  graft  should  be  in  contact  with  the  vascular  medul- 
lary cavity.  Sometimes  it  is  possible  to  push  the  graft 
straight  into  the  open  medullary  cavity  (Fig.  82).  As  a 
rule  I  avoid  the  use  of  plates  and  screws,  as  they  tend 


to  delay  union.     Various  methods  of  fixing  grafts  will 
be  mentioned  later. 

Perfect  immobilization  is  an  important  factor  in  secur- 
ing early  vascularization  and  union.  It  is  quite  true 
that  a  certain  amount  of  mobility  at  the  seat  of  a 
fracture  increases  the  output  of  callus,  but  this  is  of  a 
vicjous  and  really  useless  type.  It  is  produced  merely 
by  osteogenesis  occurring  in  the  increased  exudate 
caused  by  tearing  and  injuring  the  granulation  tissue 
which  is  being  produced  to  unite 
the  fragments  of  bone.  It  is 
much  more  reasonable  to  keep 
the  part  immobile  until  union  is 
firm  and  has  begun  to  ossify  ; 
then  the  next  stage  mentioned  be- 
low comes  into  play  to  strengthen 
the  union. 

3.  Growth  of  the  Graft. — The 
growth  and  development  of  the 
graft  so  that  it  can  perform  the 
function  of  the  bone  it  replaces 
is  best  promoted  by  a  modified 
or  guarded  exercise  of  the  func- 
tion of  the  bone,  for  then  the 
bone  cells  respond  to  the  stresses 
to  which  the  part  is  subjected, 
and  build  accordingly.  This  is 
known  as  Wolff's  law,  which  is 
an  essential  foundation  of  all 
surgery  of  bones  and  joints.  This 
law  is  familiar  to  all  surgeons, 
but  it  will  not  be  out  of  place  to 
quote  it  here  :  "  Every  change  in 
the  formation  and  function  of  the 
bones,  or  of  their  function  alone, 
is  followed  by  certain'  definite 
changes  in  their  internal  archi- 
tecture, and  equally  definite  se- 
condary alterations  of  their  ex- 
ternal conformation  in  accordance 
with  mathematical  laws."  It  follows  from  this  that 
when  the  graft  and  the  bone  have  begun  to  unite  firmly 
the  union  will  become  stronger  if  a  certain  amount  of 
functional  use  is  allowed,  provided  it  is  not  violent 
enough  to  tear  up  or  break  the  union.  Thus  in  a  graft 
in  the  leg  or  in  the  forearm  the  patient  is  encouraged  to 
move  the  tqes  or  fingers  while  the  part  is  still  in  splints, 
so  that  the  slight  traction  of  the  muscles  on  their 
origins  round  the  site  of  the  graft  may  produce  a 
physiological  stimulus  to  increased  growth. 

In  the  next  stage  the  splints  adapted  must  allow  more 


Fig.  82. — Graft  pushed  into 
open  medullary  cavity. 


BONE  GRAFTS  85 

active  use,  while  at  the  same  time  guarding  against 
strain  which  might  cause  a  "  fracture  "  at  the  seat  of  the 
graft.  Thus  in  the  case  of  the  lower  limb  an  ambula- 
tory splint  is  allowed  while  the  part  is  still  firmly 
controlled  by  local  splints. 


USES  OF  BONE  GRAFTS  IN  MILITARY  SURGERY 

i.  To  replace  Bone  destroyed  by  Infective  Pro- 
cesses, such  as  Acute  Osteomyelitis. — As  an  instance 
of  bone  grafting  after  osteomyelitis  and  of  the  extra- 


Fig.  83  A. — Osteomyelitis  of  tibia;  condition  after  removal  of  necrosed  bone. 
(Sketch  from  skiagram.) 


Fig.  83  B. —  Probe  to  hold  ends  of  tibia  apart  during  healing  of  wound. 
(Sketch  from  skiagram.) 


Fig.  83c.— Fracture  of  graft:    marked  callus  exudation.      (Sketch 
from  skiagram.) 


Fig.  83  D.— The  fracture  of  the  graft  united.     (Sketch  from  skiagtam.) 

ordinary  vitality  of  the  transplant,  I  would  relate  the 
following  facts  :  Several  years  ago  I  was  consulted  in  a 
the  case  of  a  youth  with  advanced  osteomyelitis  of  the 
tibia.  I  cut  down  along  the  whole  length  of  the  site  of 
the  tibia,  and  found  that  the  shaft  had  completely  dis- 


86  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPAEDICS 

appeared,  and  the  periosteum  also.  When  I  had  scraped 
away  all  putrid  material,  there  remained  little  except 
the  epiphyses  and  exposed  muscles.  A  long  sinus 
probe  was  fixed  lengthwise  between  the  epiphyses  in 
order  to  maintain  the  distance  between  them,  and  the 
wound  was  allowed  to  granulate.  Several  months  after 
the  wound  had  healed  and  the  probe  had  been  removed 
I  transplanted  a  long  strip  of  tibia  from  the  sound 
limb.  This  rapidly  grew  in  thickness.  The  patient  was 
discharged  from  hospital,  and  gradually  discarded  all 
supports.  Seven  months  later  he  was  knocked  down  one 
day,  receiving  a  blow  on  the  leg  which  broke  the  trans- 
plant, and  I  possess  interesting  radiographs  of  the  callus 
exudation  and  firm  union  at  the  site  of  the  fracture. 
This  case  was  a  great  encouragement  to  me,  for  the 
transplant  was  laid  in  an  environment  of  firm  cicatricial 
tissue.  The  illustrations  are  drawn  from  the  X-ray 
photographs  (Fig.  83  A,  B,  c,  D). 

2.  To  replace  Defects  of  Bone  where  Portions  of 
Bone  have  been  blown  away  by  Gunshot  Wounds. — 
Treatment  here  follows  the  same  lines  as  in  the  case 
cited. 

v  To  immobilize  Injuries  of  the  Spine  in  Cases  of 
Tuberculous  Arthritis,  or  Injuries  which  lead  to  the 
Development  of  Kyphosis. — In  the  present  war  there 
have  been  many  injuries  of  the  spine  which  have  been 
followed  by  the  rapid  development  of  a  kyphos,  some- 
times due  to  traumatic  osteo-arthritis,  sometimes  to 
tuberculous  changes  following  the  original  injury.  In 
either  case  the  treatment  requires  prolonged  rest,  during 
which  the  patient  is  fixed  in  recumbency.  The  period 
of  recumbency  can  be  very  materially  reduced  by  a 
judicious  operation. 

4.  As  a  Substitute  for  Plates  and  Screws. — Bone 
grafting  can  be  used  as  a  substitute  for  plates  and 
screws  in  the  treatment  of  certain  types  of  fractures, 
and  to  assist  in  securing  union  in  cases  of  ununited 
fractures. 

TECHNIQUE  OF  BONE  GRAFTING 

Pieces  of  bone  for  grafts  may  be  taken  from  almost  any 
bone  in  the  body,  but  for  most  purposes  the  tibia  is  the 
most  convenient  quarry  in  which  to  delve,  for  from  it 
pieces  of  bone  can  easily  be  cut  of  any  length  or  thick- 
ness likely  to  be  needed.  When  a  curved  piece  of  bone  is 
required,  as  in  surgery  of  the  jaw,  a  portion  of  suitable 
shape  may  be  found  in  one  of  the  ribs.  I  have  employed 
the  shaft  of  the  first  metatarsal  to  replace  a  defect  in 
the  ulna.  The  periosteum  is  left  behind,  the  required 
length  of  the  shaft  with  the  whole  of  the  endosteum 
being  transplanted.  The  shaft  of  the  metatarsal  bone 
is  rapidly  regenerated.  The  tibia,  however,  is  the  bone 


BONE   GRAFTING:    TECHNIQUE        87 

of  choice,  as  periosteum  can  be  transplanted  with  the 
bone. 

Operation. — The  first  stage  of  the-  operation  is  to 
prepare  the  bed  for  the  graft,  freshening  the  bone  ends. 
A  pliable  probe  is  then  laid  in  the  defect  and  bent  to  the 
exact  length  of  the  graft  required.  The  wound  is  packed 
with  gauze  to  stop  bleeding,  and  covered  with  a  sterile 
towel  while  the  surgeon  removes  the  graft  from  the 
selected  area. 

If  the  tibia  is  chosen,  an  incision  of  suitable  length  is 
made  along  the  outer  side  of  the  anterior  border  of  the 
tibia  and  the  tibialis  anticus  is  partially  separated  from 
its  insertion.  The  bent  probe  is  then  laid  on  the  bone, 
and  the  exact  length  of  the  graft  required  is  marked  off. 
The  periosteum  is  then  incised  on  the  outer  and  inner 
surfaces  of  the  bone,  completely  mapping  out  the  portion 
to  be  removed. 

The  removal  of  the  graft  is  greatly  expedited  by  the 
use  of  a  double  circular  saw  (Fig.  84)  electrically  driven. 
Great  care  must  be  taken  to  ensure  that  any  part  of  the 


Fig.  84. — Double  circular  saw  for  rutting  bone  grafts. 

apparatus  with  which  the  surgeon  or  his  assistant  may 
come  in  contact  is  scrupulously  sterilized. 

If  an  electric  motor  is  not  available  a  good  hand  motor 
may  be  used.  Failing  both,  the  graft  may  be  cut  out 
with  drill  and  chisel,  but  this  is  a  slower  process,  and 
requires  some  care  to  avoid  splintering  the  graft  or 
splitting  the  tibia.  The  method  of  procedure  is  to 
drill  a  series  of  holes  along  the  line  of  the  incision  in  the 
periosteum,  and  then  connect  these  with  the  chisel. 
The  drill  holes  should  be  made  into  the  medullary  canal, 
so  as  to  ensure  having  some  of  the  medullary  aspects 
of  the  bone  in  the  graft  (Fig.  85). 

The  transplantation  should  be  made  immediately  ; 
the  graft  should  be  picked  up  with  forceps  and  not 
touched  even  with  the  gloved  fingers.  It  is  laid  directly 
into  the  prepared  bed,  in  which  all  bleeding  has  stopped 
by  this  time.  I  am  convinced  that  it  is  a  mistake  to 
wash  the  graft  in  saline  lotion  or  leave  it  in  saline  while 
something  else  is  being  done.  The  best  results  follow 
immediate  closure  of  the  deep  tissues  round  it  and  suture 
of  the  surface  wound.  The  limb  must  then  be  securely 
controlled  in  correct  position  either  by  splints  or  by  a 
plaster-of-Paris  case. 


88  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Spinal  Fixation.  —  Two  operations  are  generally 
described  for  spinal  fixation — Albee's  and  Hibb's.  The 
details  of  the  operations  ought  to  be  pretty  well  known, 
as  they  have  been  before  the  profession  for  several  years. 

Albee's  Operation. — This  operation  consists  in  trans- 
planting a  slip  of  the  tibia  into  a  series  of  spines  of  ver- 
tebrae, bridging  the  weak  spot  in  the  vertebral  column 
(Fig.  86). 

The  surgeon  should  begin  by  preparing  the  site  for 
the  graft.  Each  spine,  including  two  above  and  two 
below  the  weak  or  diseased  vertebra  or  vertebras,  is  split 
and  broken  outwards  (Fig.  87),  the  junction  of  spine 


Fig.  85, — Sliding  graft  marked  out  by  drill  holes  preparatory  to  cutting  out 
with  chisel. 

and  lamella  being  also  roughened.  The  bed  is  packed 
with  gauze  to  stop  bleeding. 

The  graft  from  the  tibia  is  then  cut  with  the  circular 
saw,  or  chisel  and  drill.  The  front  of  the  tibia  is  reached 
by  securing  the  heel  against  the  buttock  with  the  knee  in 
acute  flexion.  This  enables  the  surgeon  to  cut  the  graft 
without  turning  the  patient  over.  The  whole  operation 
can  thus  be  performed  quietly  and  expeditiously. 

The  graft  is  then  transferred  and  implanted  while  an 
assistant  stitches  the  wound  in  the  leg.. 

No  difficulty  has  been  experienced  in  nursing  these 
cases  on  their  backs  in  a  Thomas's  frame.  This  is  applied 
most  easily  after  these  operations  by  laying  the  frame 
face  downwards  over  the  patient  and  turning  the  patient 
and  splint  together  with  the  aid  of  a  sheet,  thus  avoiding 
any  strain  upon  the  implant. 

Hibb's  Operation. — In  this  operation  bony  fixation  of 
the  spines  is  obtained  without  transplanting  bone  from 
the  tibia.  The  spines  are  split,  the  upper  and  lower 


SPINAL   FIXATION 


89 


margins  are  broken  away  towards  the  adjacent  spine,  so 
that  the  fragments  split  away  from  one  spine  interlock 
with  those  split  from  the  next.  The  laminae  can  also  be 
ankylosed.  Superfluous  chips  of  bone  are  sprinkled 


Fig.  £6. — Bone  transplanted  into  cleft  made  in  spinous  processes. 
(Albee's  method.) 

along  the  site  of  the  operation,  so  that  a  line  of  callus 
is  formed  locking  all  the  spines  together.  I  often  prefer 
to  lay  the  graft  upon  the  laminae  rather  than  between 
the  spinous  processes.  A  very  suitable  bed  can  be  pre- 


FU.  87. — Diagram  of  split  spinous  process  with  graft  inserted  in  cleft. 

pared  there  upon  which  the  transplanted  bone  easily 
lies  (Fig.  88). 

These  operations  are  particularly  useful  in  cases  in 
which  the  vertebrae  affected  are  in  the  lower  dorsal  or 
lumbar  regions,  for  it  is  difficult  to  control  these  areas 
completely  in  a  support  or  jacket  in  which  the  patient 
can  go  about.  The  alternative  is  prolonged  recumbency 


90  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

fixed  in  a  splint  or  Thomas's  frame.  The  result  of  one 
or  other  of  these  operations  is  that  a  patient  who  in 
former  days  would  have  been  kept  fixed  in  recumbency 
for  a  year  or  more  can  be  allowed  up  in  a  light  spinal 
support  in  three  months,  and  can  go  about  his  ordinary 
business  as  soon  as  he  can  walk  comfortably,  for  with 
this  osseous  bond  between  the  vertebra  there  is  prac- 
tically no  fear  of  kyphotic  deformity  occurring. 

TECHNIQUE  OF  BONE   GRAFTING  FOR  FRACTURES  AND 
DEFECTS  IN  CONTINUITY 

The  technique  of  bone  grafting  for  fractures  and  for 


Fig.  88.— Bone  graft  laid  upon  the  laminae. 

the  replacing  of  defects  in  continuity  of  long  bones, 
either  from  loss  of  bone  or  from  non-union,  follows  very 
similar  lines. 

My  views  on  the  use  of  plates  and  screws  in  the  im- 
mediate treatment  of  fractures  have  been  stated  before 
and  need  not  be  repeated  at  length.  In  most  parts  of , 
the  limbs  good  alignment  and  good  functional  results 
can  be  obtained  by  simple  reduction  and  setting  in 
appropriate  splints,  and  therefore  the  routine  use  of 
plates  seems  superfluous.  The  art  of  setting  fractures 
is  deserving  of  more  study  than  has  been  given  to  it 
by  many  members  of  our  profession  in  recent  years. 
In  the  long  bones  correct  alignment  of  the  limbs,  and 
therefore  of  the  lines  of  action  of  muscles  and  joints, 
is  more  important  than  faultless  apposition  of  the  ends 
of  the  fractured  bone. 


BONE   GRAFTING  91 

Excellent  as  plates  and  screws  are  in  certain  emer- 
gencies, experienced  surgeons  know  that  they  produce 
actual  delay  in  true  and  efficient  osseous  union  of  the 
fracture. 

In  any  case  a  metallic  plate  is  a  foreign  body,  and  the 
inevitable  tendency  of  the  tissues  is  to  encapsule  or 
encyst  the  foreign  body,  while  transplanted  bone  can  be 
built  into  the  structure  of  the  part,  and  therefore  assists 
osteogenesis. 

Bone  Grafting  for  Recent  Fracture. — In  my  experi- 
ence, spiral  fracture  of  both  bones  of  the  leg,  especially 
in  the  lower  third,  is  the  only  fracture  in  the  limbs 
which  regularly  presents  almost  insuperable  difficulties 
to  satisfactory  reduction  and  setting  by  non-operative 


Fig.  89. — A,  Inlay  slide  before  being  placed  in  position.     P,  Inlay 
graft  placed  in  position. 

means.  The  difficulty  is  not  in  reducing  the  fracture, 
but  in  persuading  the  fragments  to  stay  in  correct 
alignment.  The  cause  lies  in  the  great  tendency  of  the 
foot  and  lower  fragment  to  rotate,  and  then  the  frag- 
ments override. 

The  Sliding  Inlay  Method  (Albee). — In  this  fracture 
the  sliding  inlay  of  bone,  described  in  a  previous  chapter 
(see  p.  63),  is  a  very  fascinating  and  simple  way  of 
locking  the  two  fragments  so  that  they  do  not  easily 
disengage  when  they  undergo  slight  rotatory  move- 
ments. All  that  is  required  is  the  parallel  circular  saw 
shown  in  Fig.  84. 

The  fracture  is  reduced  and  held  or  clamped  in  position 
while  the  cuts  are  made  as  in  the  diagram  (Fig.  89  A  and 
B).  The  shorter  piece  is  lifted  out,  and  then  the  longer 
piece  with  the  medulla  is  slipped  down  to  lock  the  two 
fragments  of  the  broken  bone.  The  smaller  fragment  is 


92  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

then  laid  into  the  gap  above  the  longer  fragment  which 
has  been  slid  down.  Muscles,  periosteum,  or  any  other 
of  the  deep  tissue  belonging  to  the  part  are  stitched 
over  the  graft,  the  wound  is  closed  and  the  fracture  put 
up  in  sheet-iron  splints  or  plaster,  taking  care  that  no 
displacement  occurs.  In  a  few  days  organization  has 
occurred  sufficient  to  prevent  any  further  danger  of  dis- 
placement unless  there  is  carelessness  or  some  unusual 
disturbance  of  the  part.  It  is  seldom  necessary  to  peg 
or  screw  the  fragments,  and  the  introduction  of  a  foreign 
body  is  to  be  avoided. 

This  spiral  fracture  of  the  tibia  in  the  lower  third  of  the 
leg  is  practically  the  only  ordinary  fracture  for  which,  in 
my  opinion,  operation  should  be  considered  at  once  as  an 
immediate  procedure,  and  then  fixation  by  bone  to  pre- 
vent rotation  is  preferable  to  plating  if  it  can  be  done. 
Failing  facilities  for  a  proper  fixation  by  bone,  plating 
comes  next. 

Neither  plating  nor  bony  fixation  seems  necessary  in 
any  other  ordinary  fracture  of  the  limbs.  In  the  case 
of  unusual  fractures  exceptions  occur.  Further,  each 
surgeon  must,  of  course,  use  his  own  judgment  in  every 
case  that  comes  under  his  notice,  and  employ  those 
methods  which  he  best  understands  and  in  which  he 
feels  most  confidence.  These  will  differ  according  tto  the 
surgeon's  training.  My  contention  is,  however,  that  a 
surgeon  skilled  in  the  use  of  splints  can  get  good  results 
so  generally  that  operation  is  rarely  needed. 

Ununited  Fractures. — It  may  be  admitted  that  in 
dealing  with  ununited  fractures  when  firm  fixation  is 
required,  plates  and  screws  afford  a  most  secure  and 
rapid  means  of  fixing  the  fragments.  This  method  re- 
quires less  surgical  skill  than  when  bone  grafts  are  used, 
both  in  the  operative  procedure  and  the  after-treatment. 
There  is,  however,  always  the  point  to  be  considered 
that  in  these  cases  the  patient  has  already  shown  defec- 
tive osteogenetic  power  at  the  seat  of  fracture,  and  the 
plate  is,  after  all,  a  foreign  body,  which  will  be  likely 
to  impede  osteogenesis,  while  a  bone  graft  is  a  direct 
assistance  to  osteogenesis. 

For  many  years  I  used  to  cut  down  on  the  ununited 
fracture,  crush  and  drill  the  ends  of  the  bones  to  open 
up  new  routes  for  fresh  blood-vessels,  and  turn  a  strip 
of  periosteum  off  one  fragment  down  to  the  other. 

At  a  later  period  I  employed  in  addition  animal  bone 
as  a  graft,  with  results  which  were  not  very  encouraging. 
The  use  of  a  strip  of  the  fractured  bone  as  a  bridge 
between  the  two  fragments  was  followed  by  much  better 
results  (Figs.  90  A  and  90  B). 

It  is  assumed  in  the  methods  now  to  be  described  that 
autogenous  grafts  are  always  used.  The  three  methods 


BONE   GRAFTING 


93 


of  employing  a  graft  have  been  referred  to  in  a  previous 
chapter. 

i.   The  Lateral  Graft. — This  consists  of  laying  a  strip 
of  bone  along  the  side  of  the  bone  to  be  repaired,  taking 


Fig.  90  A. — Fashioning  of  bed  and  freshening  of  ends  for  a  slide  graft  in  an 
ununited  fracture. 


Fig.  90  B. — The  slide  in  position ;  portion  removed  from  bed  distributed 
between  ends  of  bone, 

care  to  make  a  fresh  bed  for  the  graft  along  its  whole 
length,  so  that  raw  bone  is  in  contact  with  raw  bone 
(Fig.  91). 

It  is  the  simplest  method,  and  often  the  only  one  which 
can  be  used — for  example,  when  the  ends  of  the  broken 
bone  are  tapering  and  wasted  (Figs.  92  A,  B,  c). 


Fig.  91.— Lateral  graft. 

2.  The  Intramedullary  Plug  (Fig.  82). — This  can  only 
be  employed  when  a  good  open  medullary  canal  is  avail- 
able and  the  transplanted  bone  can  be  inserted  into  the 
medulla  above  and  below  the  fracture.     This  is  often 
difficult.     It  is  advisable,  when  possible,  to  use  it  in 
combination  with  the  sliding  or  the  lateral  grafts. 

3.  The  Sliding  Inlay. — The  inlay  method  described 
above  can  be  employed  when  bridging  a  gap ;    the  bits 


94  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


of  bone  cut  from  the  end  of  the  slide  must  not  be  wasted, 
but  should  be  broken  up  and  sewn  along  the  site  of  the 
defect  to  form  additional  foci  of  osteogenesis. 

A  combination  of  the  sliding  inlay  (Figs.  90  A  and  B) 


Fig.  92. — A,   Preparing  bed  for  transplanted  lateral  graft.     B,  Transplanted 

lateral  graft  held  in  position  by  catgut.     '  ,  Transplanted  lateral  graft  held  in 

position  by  jails. 

and  medullary  plug  is  a  strong  and  satisfactory  method 
when  available  (Fig.  93). 

CONCLUSION 

Recapitulating  in  brief,  it  may  be  said  that,  whatever 
particular  theory  of  osteogenesis  may  be  the  true  one, 
the  following  points  have  proved  valuable  in  practice  : 

The   area   of   the   graft   must   be   kept   scrupulously 


Fig.  93. — The  intramedullary  plug  used  in  combination  with  the  sliding 
or  lateral  graft. 

aseptic,  and  free  from  unnecessary  blood  clot.  Adequate 
blood  supply  is  necessary  to  the  growth  of  the  graft. 

The  graft  must  be  placed  in  close  apposition  to  raw 
surfaces  of  the  bone  with  which  it  is  to  unite. 

The  whole  region  must  be  kept  fixed  for  a  long  period 
for  undisturbed  organization  to  take  place. 

The  bone  graft  should  be  autogenous,  and  it  is  better 
that  it  should  include «  both  periosteum  and  medulla 
wherever  this  is  possible,  for  both  these  aspects  of  the 
bone  afford  facilities  for  the  growth  of  new  blood-vessels. 


UNION   IN   FRACTURES  95 

Surgeons  should  have  patience,  for  union  is  often 
delayed,  and  hasty  conclusions  that  union  is  not  going  to 
take  place,  and  consequent  relaxation  of  strict  fixation 
of  the  part,  may  convert  a  case  of  delayed  union  into 
one  of  non-union. 

After  any  of  these  procedures  it  is  essential  to  fix  the 
limb  absolutely  to  let  new  vessels  grow  undisturbed 
by  chance  movements,  for  the  idea  of  the  operation  is 
that  all  the  transplanted  bits  of  bone  shall  become 
vascularized. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  limb  should  be  kept  fixed  and 
undisturbed  for  at  least  twice  the  time  necessary  for 
union  of  the  same  bone  in  an  ordinary  simple  fracture. 

I  often  see  cases  which  have  been  operated  on,  and 
in  many  instances  plated,  by  some  other  surgeon,  in 
which  splints  have  been  removed  at  the  end  of  a  few 
weeks,  and  the  case  has  been  regarded  as  a  failure  because 
union  has  not  taken  place. 

There  is  no  definite  time  within  which  a  fracture  will 
unite.  The  times  given  in  textbooks  are  understated 
as  applied  to  the  majority  of  cases.  For  example,  I 
may  quote  the  case  of  a  patient,  seen  in  1908,  with  an 
ununited  fracture  of  the  humerus  of  twelve  months' 
duration,  which  was  treated  by  the  "  hammer  and  dam  " 
method,  but  had  to  be  kept  still  for  nearly  six  months 
before  the  bones  united.  The  ultimate  union  was  abso- 
lutely satisfactory.  Operative  procedures  had  pre- 
viously failed.  This  question  of  the  consolidation  of 
fractures  has  been  discussed  in  Chapter  IV.  The  wounds 
received  in  this  war  have  brought  the  surgery  of  septic 
bones  very  much  into  the  foreground,  and  bone  grafting 
will  have  to  be  very  extensively  practised.  We  must 
be  careful  to  allow  a  sufficient  time  to  elapse  before  pro- 
ceeding to  this  operation.  It  is  difficult  to  formulate 
an  exact  rule  as  to  when  the  operation  should  be  per- 
formed, for  we  seem  never  to  be  quite  free  from  the 
danger  of  recrudescent  sepsis.  My  habit  is  to  wait  for 
at  least  six  months  after  a  sinus  is  closed,  during  which 
time  and  for  a  variable  period  afterwards  efforts  can  be 
made  to  improve  the  general  nutrition  of  the  limb. 
It  frequently  happens  that  during  this  delay  union  of 
the  fragments  takes  place,  and  no  transplantation  is 
needed.  Early  operation  is  to  be  discouraged  from 
every  point  of  view,  and  failure  to  observe  this  rule  has 
resulted  in  many  a  tragedy.  It  is  very  exceptional, 
unless  there  has  been  a  great  loss  of  bone,  for  non-union 
to  persist  in  fractures  which  are  the  seat  of  the  type  of 
suppuration  met  with  at  this  time. 


CHAPTER  VI 
DISABILITIES   OF  THE    KNEE-JOINT 

EVERY  kind  of  disability  of  the  knee-joint  may  occur  in 
military  practice,  from  a  simple  sprain  to  the  results  of 
a  severe  wound. 

An  attempt  will  be  made  in  this  chapter  to  give  a  broad 
classification  of  these  derangements  and  disabilities,  with 
their  diagnostic  signs,  and  to  indicate  appropriate  lines 
of  treatment. 

There  are  three  common  conditions  which  are  not 
always  as  clearly  distinguished  by  practitioners  as  they 
might  be.  They  are  (i)  simple  sprain  of  the  lateral 
ligament,  usually  the  internal  ;  (2)  slipping  of  the  semi- 
lunar  cartilage  ;  and  (3)  nipping  of  the  infrapatellar  pad 
of  fat.  All  these  injuries  may  be  produced  by  a  twist 
or  fall  which  at  first  does  not  seem  serious  ;  all  are 
associated  with  effusion  of  fluid  in  the  joint,  and  in  all 
the  patient  complains  of  more  or  less  recurring  disability 
after  the  lesion,  unless  it  has  been  recognized  and  treated 
in  the  first  instance. 

SPRAIN  OF  INTERNAL  LATERAL  LIGAMENT 

Sprain  of  the  internal  lateral  ligament  is  distin- 
guished by  definite  pain  and  tenderness  on  pressure  over 
the  attachments  of  the  internal  lateral  ligament ;  the 
patient  himself  localizes  the  pain  of  which  he  com- 
plains to  the  inner  side  of  the  knee  ;  definite  pain  and 
tenderness  are  not  found  anywhere  else  about  the  knee, 
and  the  movement  of  eversion  and  external  rotation 
of  the  leg  stretches  the  injured  ligament  and  retards 
recovery. 

The  treatment  indicated,  therefore,  is  firm  strapping 
round  the  knee  in  order  to  steady  it,  and  a  raising  of  the 
inner  side  of  the  heel  to  divert  body  weight  to  the  outer 
side  of  the  foot,  and  thus  relieve  the  ligament  from  ten- 
sion. It  is  hardly  necessary  to  say  that  this  treatment  is 
preceded  by  rest  in  bed,  usually  with  the  aid  of  a  straight 
posterior  splint.  This  is  the  initial  treatment,  but 
neglect  of  the  after-treatment  just  mentioned  renders 
the  patient  liable  to  recurring  injuries  of  the  ligament. 

96 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE-JOINT         97 


•  INTERNAL  DERANGEMENTS  OF  THE  KNEE 

A  regular  gradation  of  injuries  is  met  with,  from  a 
slight  strain  of  the  attachments  of  the  internal  semilunar 
cartilage  of  varying  degrees  of  gravity  to  fractures  of 
the  spine  of  the  tibia  with  rupture  of  the  crucial  liga- 
ments. The  former  is  a  condition  scarcely  distinguish- 
able at  first  sight  from  a  simple  sprain  ;  the  latter  is  at 
once  obvious  as  a  grave  disability.  It  has  become  very 
important  in  military  surgery  to  be  able  to  distinguish 
these  conditions  clearly  by  signs  which  can  be  deter- 
mined by  the  surgeon  rather  than  by  symptoms  described 
by  the  patient ;  as,  in  my  experience,  a  considerable 
number  of  men  who  wish  to  avoid  service  have  found  that 
they  can  puzzle  the  medical  officer  by  complaining  of 
obscure  pain  and  disability  in  the  knee. 

There  are  very  many  cases  in  which  military  surgeons 
have  been  led  to  operate  upon  a  normal  joint,  expecting 
to  find  some  abnormality  of  the  semilunar  cartilage. 
The  cartilage  is  very  frequently  torn  in  its  posterior 
portion,  and  before  deciding  at  operation  that  it  is  not 
damaged  it  is  necessary  to  dislodge  it  outwards.  Hence 
the  necessity  for  careful  consideration  of  symptoms 
before  deciding  to  operate  ;  it  must  be  realized  that 
exploration,  in  the  case  of  a  cartilage,  really  involves 
its  removal,  otherwise  a  damage  at  the  posterior  part 
of  the  cartilage  may  be  overlooked. 

Mechanism  of  Certain  Injuries. — Probably  the  best 
way  in  which  to  get  a  clear  idea  of  the  injuries  which 
lead  to  error  is  to  consider  the  mechanism  of  the  various 
injuries,  beginning  with  simple  sprain  and  going  on  to 
real  rupture  or  tear  of  the  semilunar  cartilage,  and  to 
compare  them  with  bruising  of  the  infrapatellar  pad  of 
fat,  which  is  a  lesion  not  always  recognized  or  under- 
stood. 

All  these  conditions  may  lead  to  a  recurring  chronic 
synovitis.  Every  case  of  recurring  synovitis  has  a  cause, 
and  practically  each  is  curable  if  the  cause  is  recognized 
and  receives  appropriate  treatment. 

It  has  already  been  stated  that  simple  sprain  of  the 
internal  lateral  ligament  is  marked  by  a  specially  tender 
spot  over  the  attachments  of  the  ligament  and  nowhere 
else. 

Rupture  of  Internal  Ligament  and  Damage  to  the 
Semilunar  Cartilage. — If  we  remember  the  anatomical 
fact  that  the  internal  semilunar  cartilage  is  closely 
connected  round  its  convex  margin  with  the  deepest 
layers  of  the  internal  ligament  and  with  the  capsule 
of  the  knee-joint,  we  shall  understand  why  a  severe 
twist  of  the  knee,  with  the  leg  abducted,  may  rupture 
the  ligament  and  drag  the  semilunar  cartilage  with  it, 


98  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

straining  or  tearing  the  attachments  of  the  anterior 
horn.  At  this  stage  the  inner  side  of  the  knee-joint  is, 
so  to  speak,  opened  out,  and  everything  depends  upon 
what  happens  when  it  closes  again  as  soon  as  the  dis- 
torting force  ceases  to  act. 

If  the  cartilage  is  caught  in  displacement  between  the 
bones  the  knee  "  locks  "  in  the  manner  familiar  to  us 
all.  The  cartilage  may  be  split,  fractured  transversely, 
rolled  up,  or  completely  torn  from  its  attachments.  A 
perusal  of  the  literature  of  the  subject,  indeed,  shows 
that  every  conceivable  injury  to  the  semilunar  cartilage 
may  take  place,  and  such  cases  have  often  been  fully 
described.  Sometimes  the  cartilage  slips  back  into 
position  without  being  crushed  or  caught  between  the 
bones  ;  there  is  then  no  locking  of  the  joint,  but,  in 
every  respect,  the  etiology  of  the  lesion  is  the  same  with 
the  exception  of  the  actual  injury  to  the  cartilage,  and 
the  patient  generally  states  that  he  felt  something 
"  slip  "  or  "  click  "  in  the  knee,  but  could  quite  easily 
straighten  it  immediately  after  the  accident. 

The  history  suggests  the  usual  cartilage  injury  of  text- 
books but  without  locking  ;  the  knee  becomes  distended 
with  fluid,  and  the  patient  refers  his  pain  to  the  inner 
side.  The  physical  signs  are  tenderness  on  pressure 
over  the  internal  lateral  ligament,  and  a  specially  tender 
spot  to  the  inner  side  of  the  ligamentum  patellae  just 
over  the  border  of  the  tibia,  a  symptom  always  strongly 
suggestive  of  an  injury  about  the  attachment  of  the 
anterior  end  of  the  internal  semilunar  cartilage. 

The  treatment  of  the  condition  when  the  knee  cannot 
be  fully  extended  without  causing  pain  will  be  discussed 
later.  If  the  knee  can  be  fully  extended  without  causing 
pain,  the  aim  should  be  to  ensure  complete  rest  until 
the  torn  attachments  have  united.  The  knee  should  be 
kept  absolutely  straight  on  a  back  splint  for  at  least 
ten  days,  the  bandage  being  firmly  applied  over  cotton- 
wool. After  this  the  patient  may  begin  to  walk,  and 
when  he  does  so  he  should  have  a  firm  bandage  over  the 
knee  to  prevent  effusion  into  it.  Movements  of  the 
joint  should  be  very  limited  the  first  day,  and  should 
gradually  increase  in  range. 

A  common  fault  in  treatment  is  to  allow  the  patient 
up  without  a  proper  protective  bandage  on  the  knee,  the 
result  of  which  is  effusion  into  the  joint,  and,  what  is 
more  harmful,  into  the  newly  formed  cicatrix  about  the 
anterior  horn  of  the  semilunar  cartilage,  thus  stretching 
the  newly  formed  scar  and  letting  the  end  of  the  cartilage 
shift  about.  When  this  happens  the  patient  is  often 
put  to  bed  for  a  week  until  the  effusion  has  disappeared, 
but  when  he  gets  up  again  the  effusion  recurs,  and  so 
he  goes  on  week  after  week,  until  finally  the  attach- 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE-JOINT         99 

merits  of  the  anterior  end  of  the  cartilage  become 
elongated  and  slack.  The  patient  then  complains  that 
occasionally  he  feels  a  "  give  "  in  the  knee,  but  it  does  not 
"  lock."  Some  day  a  slight  unusual  twist  may  result 
in  a  real  locking  of  the  joint. 

A  joint  such  as  this  which  has  been  the  seat  of  a 
definite  injury  will  generally  fill  up  with  synovial  fluid 
when  first  used.  Therefore  the  application  of  a  pressure 
bandage  should  never  be  omitted.  If  the  knee  is  care- 
fully brought  into  use  by  graduated  exercise,  there  should 
never  be  much  effusion,  and  each  day  it  should  be  less 
in  amount ;  that  is  to  say,  there  is  no  effusion  in  the 
morning,  although  by  the  end  of  the  day  it  may  have 
appeared,  and  each  evening  the  amount  is  less  than  on 
the  preceding  one. 

Thickened  Cicatrix  about  the  Semilunar  Cartilage. 
— If  the  effusion  does  not  become  progressively  less, 
either  the  patient  is  using  the  knee  too  much  and  mov- 
ing it  too  roughly,  or  some  injudicious  masseur  is 
moving  it  too  roughly  for  him,  or  the  surgeon  has  made 
a  mistake  in  his  diagnosis  and  there  is  some  condition 
in  the  joint  which  requires  further  attention,  and  he 
should  make  a  careful  examination  and  reconsider  his 
opinion  of  the  case.  When  these  cases  have  been  the 
victims  of  defective  after-treatment,  repeated  stretching 
and  effusion  about  the  anterior  end  cf  the  semilunar 
cartilage  gives  rise  to  a  thickened  cicatrix,  which  is 
tender,  and  can  sometimes  even  be  felt  by  the  surgeon 
moving  under  his  finger  as  the  knee  is  flexed  and  ex- 
tended. This  painful  spot  is  situated  at  the  diagnostic 
point,  already  described,  on  the  front  of  the  knee,  well 
to  the  inner  side  of  the  ligamentum  patellae.  Some- 
times this  cicatricial  thickening  is  so  great  that  it  is 
pinched  between  the  bones  when  the  knee  is  fully 
extended,  and  this  causes  sharp,  well-localized  pain  and 
tenderness. 

Treatment  in  such  cases  depends  upon  the  exact 
condition,  and  two  types  must  be  distinguished  : 

1.  In  cases  in  which  the  cicatrix  is  not  pinched, 
but  merely  gives  rise  to  a  sense  of  insecurity  as  if 
something    is    moving    or    "  clicking "    inside    the 
joint,  a  rigorous  course  of  strict  rest,  followed  by 
massage  and   carefully   graduated   exercises,   may 
cure  the  condition  in  a  month. 

2.  In  cases  in  which  the  cicatricial  mass  gets 
definitely  nipped,  the  condition  has  become  similar 
to  the  type  of  displaced  semilunar  cartilage  usually 
described,  and  if  rest  and  careful  exercise  fail,  an 
operation  to  remove  the  whole  mass  is  indicated — 
the  opportunity  being  taken  to  inspect  the  cartilage 
at  the  same  time. 


ioo  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Displaced  Cartilage  with  "  Locking." — It  has  long 
been  recognized  that  definite  locking  of  the  knee-joint 
is  a  characteristic  sign  of  displacement  of  the  internal 
semilunar  cartilage,  as  described  in  textbooks.  This 
condition  is  a  more  severe  variety  of  the  injury  just 
described  ;  it  differs  from  it  in  the  fact  that  some  portion 
of  the  cartilage  is,  for  a  time  at  least,  caught  between  the 
bones  and  prevents  full  extension. 

The  treatment  of  this  condition  aims  at  the  restora- 
tion of  the  power  of  extending  the  knee  fully  without 
pain. 

If  the  displaced  cartilage  is  fully  reduced  the  knee  can 
be  fully  extended,  both  actively  and  passively,  without 
pain.  If  this  cannot  be  done,  the  cartilage  is  not  re- 
duced. When  the  cartilage  becomes  disengaged  the 
patient  is  aware  of  it — in  fact,  he  is  the  most  competent 
judge  of  the  success  or  failure  of  the  manipulation. 

Treatment  of  the  Initial  Injury. — First,  complete  re- 
duction is  necessary.  This  can  usually  be  effected  by 
manipulation  without  the  use  of  force,  and  the  routine 
I  prefer  involves  the  active  assistance  of  the  patient. 
The  patient  should  lie  on  his  back  with  the  thigh  flexed 
on  the  body  and  the  leg  on  the  thigh.  When  in  this 
position  the  surgeon  can  manipulate  the  leg,  and  can 
sometimes  feel  a  fullness  over  the  site  of  the  displaced 
cartilage. 

The  patient  is  then  told  that  he  will  be  given  the  word 
"  One,  two,  three — kick  !  "  On  the  word  "  kick,"  the 
patient  extends  the  limb  as  suddenly  as  he  can.  At  the 
same  time  the  surgeon  rotates  the  foot  inwards  and  pulls, 
while  pressure  is  placed  upon  the  thigh.  If  the  dislocated 
cartilage  is  reduced,  the  patient  is  almost  certain  to 
announce  the  fact,  and  the  objective  sign  is  that  the 
knee  can  be  completely  extended  without  impediment. 
The  knee,  surrounded  by  wool,  should  be  bandaged 
firmly,  and  fixed  on  a  posterior  knee  splint.  If  the 
patient  is  not  of  a  temperament  likely  to  be  helpful,  an 
anaesthetic  is  advisable. 

Our  next  effort  is  to  secure  the  healing  of  the  lesions 
in  and  about  the  cartilage,  so  that  it  may  have  a  chance 
of  adhering  in  its  proper  position.  The  patient  should, 
therefore,  wear  the  splint  for  about  ten  days,  but  can 
usually  be  allowed  up  in  his  room  at  the  end  of  five  days. 
After  ten  days  he  may  walk  with  the  knee  bandaged, 
taking  care  not  to  bend  the  knee  suddenly.  Active 
flexion  of  the  joint  should  be  practised  very  gradually, 
and  the  quadriceps  muscle  should  be  massaged  and 
exercised  gently.  If  the  progression  is  carefully  made 
from  gentle  to  stronger  movements,  the  full  range  should 
be  recovered  without  the  recurrence  of  any  effusion  in 
the  joint  in  about  three  weeks.  The  majority  of  these 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE-JOINT       101 

cases,  carefully  and  efficiently  treated  in  the  first  in- 
stance, do  not  give  any  further  trouble. 

Where  a  successful  reduction  is  not  accomplished,  and, 
in  consequence,  the  patient  is  not  able  to  extend  the  knee 
fully,  an  operation  will  probably  be  required. 

Cases  of  Imperfect  Reduction. — I  see  many  cases  two 
or  three  weeks  or  more  after  the  accident,  in  which 
it  is  obvious  that  attempts  at  reduction  have  either 
not  been  made  or  have  failed.  The  surgeon  in  charge 
of  the  case  may  have  thought  that  he  had  got  the  knee 
fully  extended,  but  passive  extension  still  caused  pain, 
localized  over  the  anterior  end  of  the  cartilage  ;  the 
knee  filled  with  fluid  when  the  patient  walked,  and, 
though  comparatively  free  from  pain  after  rest,  it  became 
tender  after  exercise.  It  is  often  possible,  even  after 
weeks  of  displacement,  to  reduce  the  cartilage  in  these 
cases  by  manipulation  similar  in  kind  but  more  forcible 
than  that  necessary  in  dealing  with  the  oiiginal  injury. 
This  manipulation  forces  the  displaced  cartilage  from 
its  abnormal  to  its  normal  position,  where  it  may  become 
firmly  and  accurately  fixed.  This  late  reduction  so 
often  succeeds  that  it  is  always  worth  trying.  If, 
after  an  attempt  at  reduction  under  anaesthesia,  the 
cartilage  still  remains  in  a  position  in  which  it  gives 
trouble,  or  if  it  remains  loose  and  frequently  gets  nipped, 
operation  is  the  only  sure  treatment ;  for  the  case  now 
has  become  one  of  recurring  dislocation  of  the  semilunar 
cartilage  with  locking  of  the  joint. 

A  word  of  warning  may  here  be  given  about  cases  in 
which  reduction  is  apparently  complete,  and  the  patient 
can  get  about  with  tolerable  comfort,  but  complains  that 
the  knee-joint  does  not  feel  quite  secure,  although  there 
is  no  evidence  of  the  intrusion  of  any  structure  between 
the  bones.  These  symptoms  are  often  due  to  some 
minute  adhesion  within  the  joint  which  does  not  pro- 
duce sufficient  limitation  of  movement  to  be  detected 
by  the  surgeon,  but  leaves  the  patient  with  the  sense 
that  he  cannot  use  the  joint  without  a  feeling  of  restraint. 
Full  movement  of  the  joint,  particularly  in  rotation, 
under  gas  anaesthesia,  will  often  remove  these  symptoms, 
although  the  surgeon  cannot  always  feel  any  definite 
adhesion  give  way  during  the  manipulation. 

Operation  on  the  Internal  Semilunar  Cartilage. — 
It  is  needless  to  say  that  the  knee  should  never  be 
opened  except  under  the  most  scrupulously  aseptic  con- 
ditions, and  never  in  a  hospital  in  which  there  are  a 
large  number  of  septic  cases.  Operations  on  cartilages, 
even  at  base  hospitals  at  the  front,  should  be  dis- 
couraged. It  is  not  a  practice  which  can  be  recom- 
mended, as  the  environment  is  a  source  of  danger,  no 
matter  how  experienced  the  surgeon. 


loa  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

The  procedure  which  I  prefer  is  the  following  :  The 
leg  is  placed  to  hang  over  the  end  of  a  table  at  right 
angles  to  the  thigh  ;  the  knee  is  wrapped  in  sterile 
gauze,  soaked  in  biniodide  solution ;  the  incision  is 
made  through  the  gauze,  and  the  edges  of  the  gauze 
clipped  over  the  skin  edges  to  the  superficial  fascia. 
As  the  knife  with  which  the  skin  is  cut  may  become 
infected  by  Staphylococcus  albus,  a  second  clean  knife 
should  be  used  for  all  the  deeper  dissections.  The 
incision  need  not  be  more  than  an  inch  or  an  inch  and  a 
half  in  length  ;  it  is  made  over  the  anterior  end  of  the 


Fig.  94. — Showing  position  of  incision. 

cartilage,  sloping  very  slightly  downwards  and  inwards 
— that  is,  nearly,  but  not  quite,  parallel  to  the  upper 
edge  of  the  tibia  (Fig.  94).  Great  care  should  be  taken 
never  to  allow  the  incision  to  extend  far  enough  to  the 
inner  side  to  cut  any  fibres  of  the  internal  lateral  liga- 
ment ;  this  is  a  fault  which  leads  to  weakness  of  the 
knee  lasting  for  months  or  years,  and  is,  unfortunately, 
still  frequently  to  be  met  with  in  cases  which  have  been 
operated  on  by  the  old  large  J -shaped  incision  described 
in  textbooks.  The  joint  being  opened,,  a  blunt  hook 
can  be  slipped  under  the  free  margin  of  the  cartilage, 
and  by  picking  it  up  it  can  easily  be  seen  whether  the 
front  part  is  intact,  or  torn,  or  has  tags  or  projections 
producing  disability.  In  removing  the  whole  cartilage 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE  JOINT       103 

great  care  should  be  taken  that  no  tags  of  cartilage  are 
left  projecting  from  the  attachment  to  the  coronary 
ligament,  as  these  frequently  give  rise  to  continued  symp- 
toms, due  to  nipping  or  adhesions,  and  may  necessitate 
a  second  operation.  The  condition  of  the  fringes 
should  be  examined  before  closing  the  knee,  and  by 
retracting  the  patella  the  opposite  front  part  of  the 
cartilage  can  be  inspected,  if  this  be  deemed  necessary. 
No  movement  of  the  knee  must  be  allowed  after  the  in- 
cision has  been  made,  as  this  may  favour  the  entrance  of 
air — a  minute  risk,  but  an  avoidable  one,  and  therefore 
one  which  the  surgeon  has  no  right  to  take.  It  is  not 
until  the  stitching  is  complete  and  pads  are  placed  over 
the  wound  that  the  knee  is  straightened.  Dressings  are 
then  applied,  elastic  pressure  is  put  on  by  bandaging 
over  large  pads  of  wool,  and  a  simple  posterior  knee 
splint  affixed  to  keep  the  knee  straight.  If  the  operation 
is  performed  with  a  tourniquet  around  the  thigh — and 
this  is  advisable — no  vessels  need  be  tied  ;  and  if  the 
elastic  pressure  is  applied  before  the  tourniquet  is  re- 
moved there  need  be  no  fear  of  bleeding  into  the  joint. 
My  experience  of  these  operations  now  extends  to 
over  two  thousand  cases,  and  I  feel  that  I  can  speak 
with  some  authority. 

After-treatment. — In  a  straightforward  case  there 
is  no  reason  why  the  patient  should  not  get  out  of  bed 
on  to  a  couch  on  the  third  or  fourth  day.  He  should 
not,  however,  put  his  foot  to  the  ground  for  the  first 
week.  The  stitches  are  removed  as  usual  about  the  tenth 
day  and  massage  may  be  commenced,  the  patient  being 
allowed  gradually  to  bend  his  knee.  Each  day  he  exer- 
cises, bending  and  extending  the  knee  more  and  more, 
until  in  about  three  weeks  he  should  reach  the  full 
range  of  movement  and  walk  with  freedom.  In  my 
practice  several  professional  footballers  have  resumed 
their  game  in  six  or  eight  weeks  after  the  operation. 
There  is  no  reason  why  in  suitable  cases  men  should 
not  return  to  light  duty  about  five  weeks  after  the 
operation,  and,  if  properly  exercised,  be  fit  for  full  duty 
three  weeks  from  that  date.  This,  however,  depends 
upon  the  patient  being  put  through  a  course  of  carefully 
graduated  movements  and  exercises  during  the  whole 
period  of  his  convalescence. 

Surgeons  who  have  been  operating  upon  soldiers  com- 
plain of  the  weakness  in  the  knee  which  so  often  follows 
operation.  This  experience  is  common,  but  if  the 
operation  has  been  properly  performed  and  the  after- 
treatment  by  massage  and  exercise  has  been  thorough, 
these  disappointments  will  not  occur.  The  surgeon 
should  be  assured  that  the  thigh  muscles  are  restored 
to  their  normal  condition,  and  a  patient  should  not  be 


io4  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

discharged  from  hospital  until  the  thigh  has  attained 
its  normal  girth.  We  must  also  retain  a  critical  attitude 
of  mind,  for  some  soldiers  are  keen  to  remain  off  duty, 
and  the  knee  is  often  only  an  excuse. 

RECURRENT  EFFUSION  INTO  THE  KNEE-JOINT 

Recurrent  effusions  into  the  knee-joint  are  often  very 
puzzling.  It  is  possible,  however,  to  lay  down  a  few 
rules  for  guidance. 

1.  After  injury  of  the  knee,  effusion  of  fluid  into  the 
joint  is  very  liable  to  occur,  and  if  the   patient  is  kept 
resting  and  not  using  the  limb,  the  effusion  will  probably 
recur  the  first  time  he  uses  it.     The  patient  is  again   put 
to  bed,  but  when  he  gets  up  effusion  reappears.     The 
rational  treatment  in  such  cases  is  to  bandage  the  knee 
firmly  and  let  him  walk,  and  in  the  evening  there  will  be 
some  effusion  which  will  disappear   by  morning.     The 
knee  should  again  be  bandaged  and  the  patient  allowed 
to  walk.     In  the  evening  there   will   still   be   effusion, 
but  not  so  much  as  before.     By  following  this   routine 
the  joint  will  gradually  become  accustomed  to  the  in- 
creasing exefcise,  with  a  diminishing  amount  of  effusion 
on  each  day.     This  is  the  real  test  that  a  joint  which 
has    been  injured   is    really    recovering    and    is    fit    for 
gradually  increasing  exercise. 

2.  The  second  point  is  that  recurring  effusion  which 
increases  instead  of  diminishes  under  the  above  careful 
treatment  is   a  sure  indication  that  the    joint  is   not 
fit  for  use,  and  localizing   symptoms  and  signs  should 
be  searched  for  to  find  what  is  the  precise  cause  of  the 
disability. 

3.  Recurring    effusion  which  is    associated    on    each 
occasion  with   some    slight    mishap — a    trifling    strain, 
such  as  a  twist  of  the  knee,  a  feeling  that  something  has 
slipped   in   the   joint,    or   definitely   localized    pain — is 
rather  an  indication   that  there  is   some  definite   body 
loose  in  the  joint  which  is  occasionally  getting  nipped, 
though  not    retained    long  enough    in  one  position  to 
produce  "  locking."     The  surgeon  should    then  decide 
whether  it  is  an  enlarged  pad  of  fat,  a  loosened  cartilage, 
or  a  loose  "  body,"  or  a  portion  of  the  cartilage  left  after 
operation. 

DISLOCATIONS  OF  THE  EXTERNAL  SEMILUNAR 
CARTILAGE 

The  symptoms  associated  with  accidents  to  the  ex- 
ternal semilunar  cartilage  are  much  less  clearly  defined 
than  those  associated  with  injury  of  the  internal 
cartilage.  One  reason  for  this  is  that  the  external 
cartilage  is  not  attached  to  the  external  lateral  ligament 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE  JOINT       105 

of  the  joint,  and  there  is  no  definite  mechanism  by 
which  it  is  pulled  out  of  place.  "  Locking  "  may  occur, 
the  pain  being  referred  to  the  front  or  back  portion  of 
the  outer  part  of  the  knee  according  as  the  anterior 
or  posterior  end  of  the  cartilage  is  torn  from  its  attach- 
ment or  crumpled  up.  Cases  occur  in  which  both  car- 
tilages are  displaced  by  one  injury,  suggesting  that 
it  is  only  a  rather  more  severe  accident  than  that 
usually  associated  with  the  displacement  of  the  internal 
cartilage  which  damages  the  external  one  also,  the 
mechanism  probably  being  a  lateral  sliding  of  the  con- 
dyle  on  the  top  of  the  tibia,  squeezing  the  cartilage  out 
of  place  and  tearing  its  attachment. 

RUPTURE  OF  CRUCIAL  LIGAMENTS 

In  more  severe  accidents  to  the  knee  the  displacement 
of  the  tibia  on  the  femur  may  be  sufficiently  great  to 
cause  rupture,  not  only  of  lateral  ligaments,  but  of  the 
intrinsic  ligaments  of  the  joint.  This  may  or  may  not 
amount  to  what  may  be  described  as  complete  disloca- 
tion. Experience  of  cases  of  dislocation  of  the  knee- 
joint,  in  which  of  necessity  all  the  ligaments  have  been 
torn,  proves  that  with  appropriate  rest  in  a  correct 
position  an  astonishingly  good  result  can  be  obtained. 
When  called  on  to  treat  a  serious  accident  such  as  this, 
the  practitioner's  instinct  is  to  get  the  limb  straight 
and  to  keep  it  fixed  for  a  long  time.  It  is  when  the 
accident  has  been  less  than  a  complete  dislocation  that 
one  is  liable  to  think  that  less  strict  treatment  may 
suffice.  Consequently,  cases  are  met  with  in  which 
the  patient  suffers  from  abnormal  mobility  of  the  knee- 
joint,  clearly  indicating  that  one  or  both  of  the  crucial 
ligaments  have  been  ruptured  or  stretched.  Bearing  in 
mind  the  mechanism  of  the  crucial  ligaments,  it  is  not 
difficult  to  make  a  diagnosis. 

1.  The  anterior  crucial  ligament  is    tense  when    the 
knee  is  fully  extended,  and  prevents  the  tibia  from  being 
displaced  forwards  on  the  femur. 

2.  The  posterior  crucial  ligament   is    tense   in    com- 
plete flexion,  and  prevents  the   tibia   from   being    dis- 
placed backwards  on  the  femur. 

3.  Both  ligaments  check  inward  rotation  of  the  tibia. 
Hence,  if  the  tibia  cannot  be-  displaced  forwards  in  the 
extended  position,  it  may  be  assumed  that  the  anterior 
crucial  ligament  is   not  completely  torn  ;     and  if  the 
tibia  cannot  be  displaced  backwards  in  full  flexion,  the 
posterior  crucial  ligament  is  presumably   not  ruptured. 
Abnormal  mobility  indicates  elongation  or   rupture  of 
the  corresponding  ligament.    The  history  of  an  injury 
helps  the  surgeon  to  exclude  cases  in  which  prolonged 


106  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

distension  of  the  joint  with  fluid  has  caused  elongation 
of  all  the  ligaments,  as  well  as  the  conditions  associated 
with  diseases  such  as  Charcot's  disease  or  locomotor 
ataxia. 

The  treatment,  when  any  such  condition  is  diagnosed, 
is  prolonged  rest  with  the  knee  in  extension,  or  fixed 
in  plaster,  or  a  Thomas  calliper  splint,  in  which  the 
patient  can  walk,  the  object  being  to  keep  the  joint 
immobilized  for  a  time  long  enough  to  allow  union  of 
the  torn  ligaments  or  adaptive  shortening  of  stretched 
tissue.  The  operation  of  stitching  the  ligaments  is 
absolutely  futile  as  a  mechanical  procedure.  Natural 
cicatricial  tissue,  allowed  to  mature  without  being 
stretched,  is  the  only  reliable  means  of  repair. 

FRACTURE  OF  THE  SPINE  OF  THE  TIBIA 

The  mechanism  of  this  accident  appears  to  be  the 
following :  The  knee  is  subjected  to  violent  torsion 
such  as  might  produce  a  dislocation  or  rupture  of  the 
crucial  ligaments  ;  at  the  time  when  the  force  is  applied 
the  condyle  of  the  femur  grinds  across  the  surface  of 
the  tibia,  and  the  sharp  intercondylar  margin  shears 
off  the  spine.  In  some  cases  avulsion  of  the  spine 
occurs  instead  of  rupture  of  the  crucial  ligaments. 
The  displaced  fragment  of  bone  may  be  lodged  in  the 
front  part  of  the  knee-joint,  and  so  prevent  its  full 
extension.  Diagnosis  is  verified  by  X-ray  examination. 

Symptoms. — The  most  constant  symptom  is  a  some- 
what rigid  block  to  full  extension,  usually  accom- 
panied by  pain  behind  the  patella. 

Treatment. — If  the  knee  can  be  fully  extended  the 
displaced  fragment  of  bone  being  presumably  pushed 
back  somewhere  between  the  condyles,  the  knee  should 
be  fixed  in  this  position  for  a  long  period  to  allow  the 
torn  structures  to  reunite.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the 
displaced  fragment  blocks  extension,  and  the  surgeon 
cannot  manipulate  it  back  into  a  harmless  position,  or 
extend  the  knee  even  by  moderate  force,  it  is  best  to 
remove  the  obstructing  fragment  of  bone,  fixing  the 
knee  afterwards  in  a  straight  position,  and  leaving 
Nature  to  effect  her  own  repair.  The  surgeon  must 
use  his  own  judgment  as  to  the  route  he  adopts  ;  the 
freest  access  is  obtained  by  splitting  the  patella  longitu- 
dinally (Fig.  95),  but  if  the  X-rays  show  that  the  offend- 
ing fragment  of  bone  could  be  reached  by  an  incision 
at  the  side  of  the  patella,  this  is  a  less  severe  method  of 
procedure.  As  I  am  largely  responsible  for  the  split - 
patella  route  in  dealing  with  unusual  derangements, 
I  am  anxious  to  emphasize  that  it  is  only  needed  in 
exceptional  cases. 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE-JOINT        107 


THICKENED  RETROPATELLAR  PADS  OF  FAT 

Almost  any  injury  of  the  knee  which  is  associated 
with  increased  vascularity  or  bruising  may  give  rise  to 
swelling  of  the  pad  of  fat  situated  behind  the  patellar 
ligament.  Consequently  this  fat  is  liable  to  be  nipped 
in  full  extension  of  the  knee.  In  ordinary  civil  life,  this 
forms  one  of  the  varieties  of  the  initial  stage  of  a  local 
monarticular  rheumatoid  arthritis.  The  condition,  how- 
ever, is  in  no  sense  rheumatic.  The  patient  complains 
of  pain  and  tenderness  in  the  knee  after  walking,  and 
especially  when  going  up  and  down  stairs,  or  when  getting 
up  suddenly  from  a  chair  after  sitting  for  any  length  of 


Fig. 95. — Showing  patella  split.    A,  Femur:  l!, Tibia:  c.  Transverse  ligament: 

i>.  Anterior  crucial  ligament;  E,  Posterior  crucial  ligament;  F,  Cut  halves  of 

patella. 

time.  The  condition  is  maintained  by  the  repeated 
small  injuries  which  occur  every  time  the  knee  is  fully 
extended.  The  treatment,  therefore,  is  obviously  to 
prevent  the  patient  from  inflicting  small  bruises  on 
the  tender  fat  and  its  covering  of  synovial  membrane. 
This  can  easily  be  done  by  putting  a  cork  pad,  half  an 
inch  thick,  inside  the  boot  under  the  heel,  to  prevent 
the  complete  extension  of  the  knee  during  walking,  and 
by  fitting  the  knee  with  a  cage  support  (Figs.  96  and  97), 
which  allows  full  flexion  but  limits  extension  by  about 
30  degrees.  When  wearing  this  boot  and  cage  splint  the 
patient  cannot  fully  extend  the  joint  and  in  this  way 
bruise  the  post-patellar  fat.  The  swelling  gradually 
disappears,  and  .after  a  few  weeks  full  extension  can 
be  performed  without  pain.  The  diagnosis  of  this 


condition  is  easy.  The  patient  complains  of  pain  in  the 
knee,  or,  more  often,  in  the  front  of  the  knee,  not  at 
the  inner  side.  Passive  extension  of  the  knee  by  the 
surgeon  produces  the  pain,  which  is  definitely  localized 
just  below  and  behind  the  patella.  On  palpation  the 
thickening  of  the  pad  of  fat  may  be  felt ;  it  is  enlarged 
and  tender,  but  there  is  no  sensitiveness  over  the  in- 
ternal cartilage  or  the  internal  lateral  ligament.  In 
some  instances  the  retropatellar  pad  of  fat  may  be  bruised 
in  common  with  injury  to  the  semilunar  cartilage. 


Fig.  96. — Cage  support  for 
knee. 


Fig.  97. — Cage  support  for 
knee  applied. 


The  full  tender  point  of  the  internal  lateral  ligament, 
cartilage,  and  fatty  pad  will  be  found  in  such  a  case.. 

In  all  the  injuries  of  the  knee  which  I  have  been  dis- 
cussing, wasting  and  weakening  of  the  quadriceps 
muscle  is  a  characteristic  feature,  and  no  treatment  can 
be  regarded  as  sufficient  which  does  not  provide  for  the 
restoration  of  the  efficiency  of  this  muscle  during  the 
stage  of  convalescence.  This  is  particularly  to  be  noted 
in  the  condition  which  is  now  under  discussion,  for  some 
of  the  deep  short  fibres  of  the  subcrureus  muscle  are 
inserted  into  the  synovial  membrane  of  the.  joint,  and 
when  they  contract  they  draw  up  the  synovial  mem- 
brane and  help  to  pull  the  pad  of  fat  out  of  danger 
when  the  knee  is  extended.  Neglect,  therefore,  of  the 


DISABILITIES   OF   KNEE-JOINT       109 

quadriceps    muscle    will    leave    the    patient    peculiarly 
liable  to  a  recurrence  of  the  injury. 

If  the  reader  has  appreciated  the  regular  gradation 
of  disorders  of  the  knee  already  described,  he  should  have 
little  difficulty  in  applying  and  adapting  the  method  of 
diagnosis  and  treatment  to  unusual  types  which  occur 
as  a  result  of  injuries  in  military  service.  Even  bullet 
wounds  through  the  joint,  which  sometimes  chip  off 
fragments  of  bone,  can  be  dealt  with  on  lines  similar  to 
those  indicated  for  fractures  of  the  spine  of  the  tibia. 
The  whole  question  of  septic  arthritis  in  and  about  the 
joints,  with  resulting  ankylosis,  is  a  larger  subject, 
which  cannot  be  dealt  with  in  these  pages. 


CHAPTER    VII 

THE    MECHANICAL  TREATMENT   OF   FRAC- 
TURES   UNDER    WAR   CONDITIONS 

THE  methods  employed  must  be  both  efficient  and 
simple  ;  they  must  allow  easy  and  painless  access  to 
the  wound,  and  ensure  immobilization  of  the  limb 
during  transport.  The  following  notes  are  a  contribu- 
tion towards  the  attainment  of  these  needs,  but  it  must 
be  understood  that  modifications  of  them  may  be 
rendered  necessary  by  the  severity  of  the  wounds,  or 
by  the  necessity  of  providing  for  the  transport  of  the 
patient,  should  early  evacuation  be  necessary. 

Plaster-of-Paris,  so  often  used  in  the  treatment  of 
simple  fractures,  becomes  a  filthy  method  where  sup- 
puration has  occurred.  Despite  every  precaution  for 
the  exposure  of  the  wound  the  plaster  mops  up  dis- 
charges, and  becomes  horribly  offensive,  adding  to  the 
infection  of  the  wound.  I  would  urge  my  young  col- 
leagues at  the  front  to  discard  it  altogether. 

FRACTURES   THROUGH   THE   LOWER   SPINE 
AND  PELVIS 

Fractures  through  the  lower  spine  and  pelvis  are,  in 
my  opinion,  best  treated  on  the  double  Thomas  frame. 
(Figs.  98,  99,  100).  All  that  is  needed  is  to  place  the 
patient  on  the  frame,  bandage  the  limbs,  and  press  the 
body  and  leg  wings  into  position  to  prevent  side  move- 
ment. If  there  is  any  wound  on  the  posterior  surface 
that  requires  dressing,  the  pad  can  be  shaped  accordingly 
to  allow  of  access. 

THOMAS'S  DOUBLE  FRAME 

Measurements  required  :  Nipple  to  external  malleolus. 
Splint  Measurement :   4  in.  less  than  above  measure- 
ment. 

Application. — Place  the  patient -on  the  splint  with 
the  buttocks  on  either  side  of  the  horseshoe-shaped 
gap  in  the  back  pad,  which  has  been  left  for  nursing  pur- 
poses. The  wings  of  the  splint  should  then  be  moulded 


FRACTURES:  WAR    CONDITIONS       m 


round  the  patient's  chest  and  ribs,  care  being  taken  to 
turn  them  up  acutely  enough  from  the  back  pad  to  pre- 
vent side  movements  of  the  body.      A  5-in. -thick   pad 
is    placed    under    each 
knee    to   prevent    genu 
recurvatum,     and     the 
ankle  grips,  which  reach 
just  above  the  malleoli, 
must   be   well    padded. 
The  knees  are  now  ban- 
daged    firmly     to     the 
splint,     and      constant 
pressure  of  bed-clothes 
on     the     feet     avoided 
during  treatment. 

Double  Frame  too 
Short. — Place  the  pa- 
tient as  high  up.  on  the 
splint  as  the  lesion  will 
allow.  Posterior  knee 


Fig.  98.— Thomas's  double 
frame. 


Fig.  99. — Thomas's  doable  frame 
applied. 


splints  firmly  bandaged  to  the  knees  will  be  found  to 

supply  the  deficiency  at  the  foot  of  the  splint  quite  well. 

Double    Frame. too    Long — Place   the  patient    on 

the  splint  with  chest  band  at  the  nipple  line  as  usual. 


ii2  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Readjust  the  back  pad  sufficiently  high  up  the  splint  to 
allow  for  nursing  purposes.  The  pads  under  the  knees 
will  require  to  be  larger,  and  the  heels  must  be  protected 
with  rectangular  foot  splints  or  plaster-of-Paris,  as 
they  will  be  lying  on  the  leg  bars  of  the  splint — other- 
wise, proceed  as  usual. 

Hints  for  Nursing  a  Patient  on  Double  Frame. — 
The  patient  should  never  be  turned  for  nursing  purposes, 
or  the  spine  and  limbs  will  sag  laterally.  Place  a 
block  underneath  the  bar  between  the  ankles  to  avoid 
pressure  on  the  heels,  increasing  the  height  of  the  block 
when  necessary  to  insert  a  flat  bedpan  beneath  the 
splint.  In  this  raised  position  all  necessary  washing  of 
the  buttocks  can  be  done.  The  patient  is  never  taken 
from  the  splint,  nor  are  the  bandages  removed  for 


Fig.  100. — Method  of  lifting  patient  on  Thomas's  double  frame. 

any  purpose,  but  only  the  exposed  skin  washed.  The 
feet  should  be  supported  at  right  angles,  and  protected 
from  the  weight  of  the  bed-clothes. 


HIP  AND  UPPER  THIGH 

Fractures  through  the  hip- joint  and  those  just  below 
the  trochanter  are  best  treated  by  a  modification  of 
the  Thomas  splint,  which  I  have  described  as  an  "  ab- 
duction frame  "  (Fig.  101).  It  is  a  splint  upon  which 
the  patient  lies  and  can  be  carried  (Figs.  101  and  102)  ; 
extension  is  easily  applied,  maintained,  and  need  not 
be  relaxed  for  any  purpose.  The  patient  is  placed  upon 
this  splint,  and  any  displacement  should  be  overcome 
by  immediate  extension  in  the  abducted  plane.  The 
limb  should  be  rotated  inwards  slightly  until  the  foot 
is  at  right  angles  to  the  table  and  be  fixed  in  this  position 


FRACTURES:    WAR  CONDITIONS      113 

on  the  frame.  It  will  be  seen  by  the  illustration  that 
)th  limbs  are  controlled  and  that  extension  is  secured 
by  strapping  on  the  injured  limb  with  counter  ex- 
tension by  means  of  a  smooth  leather  groin  strap  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  pelvis.  This  groin  strap  should 
not  be  slackened  by  the  nurse  under  any  pretext,  but 
in  order  to  avoid  pressure  sores  she  should  be  instructed 
to  alter  the  area  of  skin  subjected  to  it  over  the  ad- 
ductor muscles  by  moving  it  to  and  fro.  This  method 
of  "  fixed  extension  "  in  abduction  secures  the  lower 


Fi{.  101. — Left  abduction  frame. 

limb  in  relation  to  the  pelvis  in  a  manner  which  can 
never  be  satisfactorily  achieved  by  weight  and  pulley, 
where  reliance  is  placed  on  the  weight  of  the  body  for 
counter-extension.  It  is  by  reflex  nervous  impulses, 
induced  by  changes  of  tension  in  the  muscle,  that 
muscular  spasm  is  produced.  A  patient  lying  in  bed 
with  a  fractured  femur — high  up  or  lower  in  the  shaft — • 
cannot  avoid  constantly  changing  the  state  of  tension 
of  the  muscles  of  his  thigh  if  a  weight  and  pulley  are 
attached  to  his  limb.  The  counterpoise  is  the  weight 
of  his  body.  Every  time  he  tries  to  shift  the  position 
of  his  shoulders  by  digging  his  elbows  into  the  bed 
he  alters  the  tension  of  his  muscles,  calling  forth  a 


H4  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

reflex  spasm.  When  he  falls  asleep  and  his  muscles 
relax  ;  when  he  moves  in  his  sleep  ;  when  he  is  lifted 
xipon  a  bedpan  or  moved  slightly  by  the  nurses  to 
have  his  bed  put  straight,  there  is  apt  to  recur  this 
reflex  contraction  due  to  sudden  change  in  tension. 

The  long  Listen  splint,  which  is  much  in  use,  is  quite 
unsuitable  for  fractures  of  the  upper  thigh.  It  does  not 
permit  abduction,  but  maintains  the  limb  in  line  with 


Fig.  102. — Left  abduction  frame  applied.         Fig.  103. — Left  abduction  frame: 

limbs  parallel  for  transport. 

the  trunk — a  position  which  must  result  in  angular 
union,  and  in  a  sagging  which  proves  one  of  the  very 
common  and  troublesome  deformities.  Furthermore, 
as  the  splint  extends  to  the  axilla,  any  movement  of 
the  trunk  involves  movement  of  the  limb,  and  attention 
to  the  secretion  disturbs  the  fracture.  Both  the  Listen 
and  the  ordinary  weight  and  pulley  are  ill  suited  for 
any  form  of  fracture  with  suppuration,  where  good 
alignment,  comfort  and  ease  of  transport  are  desired. 
One  of  the  objections  to  the  old  abduction  frame  was 
the  difficulty  of  transport.  The  abducted  limb  proved 


FRACTURES  :  WAR   CONDITIONS     115 

difficult  both  on  the  boat  and  in  the  train.  To  obviate 
this,  the  splint  is  now  made  so  that  the  patient  may  be 
put  up  for  transport  with  both  limbs  parallel.  As  soon 
as  the  patient  arrives  at  hospital  the  limb  is  abducted 
without  disturbing  him  in  any  other  way  (Fig.  103). 

The  patient  who  lies  on  an  "  abduction  frame  "  can 
be  lifted  and  moved  without  pain,  without  disturbing 
the  fracture  or  relaxing  the  extension,  and  the  dressing 
can  be  changed  without  interfering  with  the  mechanism 
of  fixation.  If  the  wound  is  through  the  buttock  and 
the  discharge  takes  place  there,  the  splint  can  be  modified 


Fig.  104. — Modified  abduction  frame  for  pelvic  wound ;  only  to  be  used 
while  wound  discharges. 

as  shown  in  the  illustration  (Fig.  104).     The  abduction 
frame  can  be  applied  in  a  few  minutes. 

ABDUCTION    FRAME 

Measurements  required  :  Nipple  to  external  malleolus. 
Splint  Measurement  :   From  chest  band  to  ankle  grip, 
4  in.  short  of  above  measurement. 

Application. — A  strip  of  adhesive  plaster,  to  which  a 
strong  loop  has  been  sewn  at  one  end,  is  applied  to  each 
side  of  each  leg.  The  adhesive  plasters  should  reach 
from  as  near  the  lesion  as  possible  to  the  malleoli — the 
loops  lying  at  each  side  of  the  heel.  Bandage  these 


n6  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

on  firmly.  The  patient  now  lies  on  the  splint  (see 
"  Double  Frame,"  p.  no),  but  before  bandaging  down  the 
knees  lay  the  body  of  the  groin  strap  along  the  gluteal 
fold  of  the  sound  limb,  securing  it  by  means  of  its  per- 
forated ends  to  the  pegs  on  the  splint  wing.  Next  apply 
the  traction  required  to  the  injured  limb,  maintaining  it 
by  tying  the  external  loops  to  the  end  of  the  splint  by 
means  of  bandage  which  has  previously  been  passed 
through  the  loops.  The  groin  strap  remains  stationary. 
Further  traction  of  the  limb  is  obtained  by  means  of 
this  extension.  The  sound  limb  should  have  very  slight 
traction  applied  to  avoid  pelvic  tilting. 

If  Abduction  Frame  too  Short. — Place  patient  on 
abduction  frame  allowing  only  about  6  in.  of  space 
between  the  heels  and  the  extension  loops  of  the  splint. 
Move  the  back  pad  higher  up  the  splint  fitting  the  gap 
between  the  patient's  buttocks  for  nursing  purposes. 
Having  fitted  the  groin  strap  to  the  patient's  gluteal 
fold,  tie  the  perforated  ends  over  the  chest  band  of  the 
splint  at  the  axilla  and  proceed  as  usual. 

If  Abduction  Frame  too  Long. — Place  patient  on 
abduction  frame,  fixing  the  groin  strap  in  the  usual 
manner.  If  the  chest  band  will  not  mould  down  suffi- 
ciently to  lie  comfortably  in  each  axilla,  it  may  be 
turned  back  flat  with  the  bed  and  ignored.  Heels  that 
do  not  reach  beyond  the  leg  piece  of  the  splint  must  be 
protected  from  pressure  with  a  rectangular  foot  splint  or 
plaster-of- Paris,  and  proportionately  thicker  pads  placed 
under  the  knees  (see  "  Double  Frame"). 

Nursing  Hints  for  Patient  on  Abduction  Frame. 
— The  patient  should  never  be  turned  for  nursing  pur- 
poses, or  the  spine  and  limbs  will  sag  laterally.  Place 
a  block  underneath  the  bar  between  the  ankles  to  avoid 
pressure  to  heels,  increasing  height  of  block  when  neces- 
sary to  insert  a  flat  bedpan  beneath  the  splint.  Also  in 
this  raised  position  all  necessary  washing  of  the  buttocks 
can  be  done.  The  patient  is  never  taken  from  the 
splint  nor  are  the  bandages  removed  for  this  purpose, 
but  only  the  exposed  skin  washed.  The  feet  should 
be  supported  at  right  angles,  and  protected  from  the 
weight  of  the  bed-clothes.  Remove  the  groin  strap 
for  five  minutes  four-hourly  during  the  first  twenty- 
four  hours  ;  twice  daily  is  usually  sufficient  afterwards. 
Rub  area  with  spirit  and  powder  during  these  intervals, 
replacing  strap  in  same  hole  as  before,  but  as  much  as 
possible  over  a  different  adductor  skin  surface. 

UPPER  MIDDLE  AND  LOWER  THIGH 

For  all  other  fractures  of  the  thigh  the  Thomas  bed 
splint  is  incomparably  the  simplest  and  best  (Fig.  61). 


FRACTURES:    WAR  CONDITIONS     117 

I  have  often  fixed  a  fractured  thigh  in  this  splint  and 
sent  the  patient  home  in  a  cab.  By  reason  of  its  con- 
struction, it  automatically  secures  a  correct  alignment, 
as  any  surgeon  with  a  mechanical  mind  can  see  if  he 
examines  the  illustration.  I  am  in  the  habit  of  using 
this  splint  for  the  treatment  of  all  fractures  of  the 
middle  and  lower  third  of  the  thigh,  fractures  through 


Fig.  105. — Strapping  extensions  applied  to  leg.     Suspension  slings 
to  splint  to  support  limb. 

the  knee-joint,  and  fractures  through  the  upper  and 
upper  middle  portion  of  the  leg. 

The  application  of  the  Thomas  bed  splint  is  quite 
easy.  Strapping  of  adhesive  plaster  is  applied  in  the 
usual  way  to  the  sides  of  the  limb.  At  the  lower  end 
of  the  extension  strapping  there  is  a  loop  of  webbing  to 
which  is  attached  a  length  of  strong  bandage  (Fig.  105) . 
The  ring  of  the  splint  is  passed  over  the  foot  (Fig.  106) 
and  up  to  the  groin  till  it  is  firmly  against  the  tuber 


ri8  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 


ischii.  The  extensions  are  then  pulled  tight,  the  ends 
turned  round  each  side  bar  (Fig.  107)  and  tied  together 
over  the  bottom  end  of  the  splint,  which  should  project 

6  or  8  in.  beyond  the  foot. 
Care  must  be  taken  to  avoid 
internal  or  external  rotation 
of  the  limb,  the  foot  being 
kept  at  right  angles.  Local 
splints  can  then  be  em- 
ployed, and  are  made  of  block 
tin  or  sheet  iron.  They  can 
be  moulded  by  the  hand  to 
fit  the  limb,  and  yet,  being 
gutter-shaped,  they  are  rigid 


Fig.  106. — Introducing  limb  through 
ring  of  Thomas's  knee  splint. 


Fig.  107.— Knee  splint 

in    position,    traction 

applied. 


longitudinally  (Fig.  108).  They  can  be  disinfected  by 
fire  or  water.  A  couple  of  transverse  bandage  slings 
suspend  the  limb  from  the  side  bars  of  the  knee  splint. 
A  straight  splint  is  placed  behind  the  suspensory  band 


FRACTURES:   WAR   CONDITIONS      119 

ages  of  the  thigh  and  knee.  On  the  front  of  the  thigh 
another  sheet-iron  splint  is  applied,  and  the  femur  is 
thus  kept  rigid.  The  alignment  from  the  hip-joint  to 
the  ankle  is  perfect,  being  dependent  on  a  straight 
pull  (Fig.  109). 

One  may  prefer  to  use  a  screw  extension  instead  of 
bandage  in  some  cases,  when  there  is  difficulty  in  main- 
taining the  full  length  of  the  limb  (Fig.  no).  This  splint 
allows  the  patient  to  raise  his  shoulders,  or  even  sit 
in  bed.  His  other  leg  can  be  moved  freely  without 
altering  the  tension  on  his  thigh  muscles,  and  there  is 
no  reflex  spasm.  Even  if  the  muscles  try  to  contract 
they  cannot,  for  the  ring  of  the  splint  is  firm  against 
the  tuber  ischii.  The  muscles  therefore  do  not  remain 


Fig.  103. — Sheet-iron  splints  moulded  by  hand  for  various  uses. 

on  the  alert  but  become  quiescent,  and  starting  pains 
do  not  occur.  Such  is  the  difference  between  "  fixed  " 
and  "  intermittent  "  extension. 

In  using  this  splint  a  little  attention  is  necessary  to 
prevent  soreness  of  the  perineum.  The  ring  of  the 
splint,  being  covered  with  smooth  basil  leather,  can 
easily  be  kept  clean ;  so  can  the  skin-.  The  dressings 
can  be  applied  without  in  any  way  interfering  with  the 
action  of  the  splint.  When  the  fracture  has  occurred 
through  the  knee  or  upper  tibia  the  splint  is  applied 
in  the  same  way. 

It  has  often  been  a  matter  of  astonishment  to  me 
that  so  simple  and  effective  a  splint  has  not  been 
universally  employed.  It  can  be  applied  in  a  few 
minutes,  usually  without  an  anaesthetic,  and  one  is 
always  sure  of  good  length  and  good  alignment.  The 


120  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

fractured  limb  can  be  moved  in  any  direction  without 
giving  pain,  so  that  transport  is  easy  and  safe.  I  have 
never  yet  had  to  plate  or  wire  a  femur  in  a  recent  case, 
and  this  I  ascribe  to  using  the  Thomas  splint. 

THOMAS'S  BED  KNEE-SPLINT 

Measurements  required  :   Horizontal  circumference  of 
thigh  at  groin,  length  of  leg  from  fork  to  base  of  heel. 


Fig.    109.  —  Thomas's 

bed    knee-splint    with 

local  splints  applied. 


Fig.  110.— Screw  ex- 
tension  which  may  be 
used  with  Thomas  s 
knee  'splint  or  abduc- 
tion frame. 


Splint  Measurement  :  Add  1 1  in.  to  circumference 
measurement  to  allow  for  obliquity  of  ring.  Add  6  in. 
to  8  in.  to  length  of  leg  measurement  to  allow  for  ex- 
tension pull. 

Application. — Apply  a  strip  of  adhesive  plaster,  to 
which  a  loop  has  been  sewn  at  one  end,  to  each  side  of 
the  leg  with  the  loop  lying  at  the  heel.  These  should 
be  firmly  bandaged  on  and  reach  from  the  heel  to  as 
near  the  lesion  as  possible.  Slide  the  ring  of  the  splint 
over  the  foot  and  up  the  leg,  pushing  the  ring  well  into 


FRACTURES:   WAR  CONDITIONS     121 

the  groin,  and  apply  the  necessary  counter-extension  on 
the  limb.  This  counter-extension  is  maintained  by 
tying  the  extension  loops  to  the  end  of  the  splint  by 
means  of  bandage  which  has  been  previously  passed 
through  the  loops. 

A  posterior  knee-splint,  short  enough  just  to  avoid  the 
gluteal  fold  at  the  upper  end  and  the  heel  at  the  lower 
end,  is  then  slung  between  the  side  bars  of  the  bed  splint 
to  support  the  limb.  Local  splints  can  be  applied  if 
required,  and  the  whole  bandaged  compactly  together. 
Sling  or  support  the  foot  of  the  splint  to  prevent  pressure 
of  the  heel  on  the  bed. 

If  the  Splint  is  too  Large  in  the  Ring. — Fix  a  suffi- 
ciently large  soft  pad  in  the  ring  at  its  junction  with 
the  outer  bar  to  prevent  the  inner  portion  of  the  ring 
slipping  from  the  groin  across  the  perineum. 

If  the  Splint  is  too  Small  in  the  Ring, — Saw  through 
the  ring  just  in  front  of  its  junction  with  the  outer 
bar  ;  open  as  necessary. 


Fig.  111. — Skeleton  splint  for  injuries  near  the  ankle-joint. 

Nursing  Hints  for  Patient  with  Thomas  Bed  Knee= 
Splint. — This  is  usually  applied  when  extension  of  the 
limb  is  required  ;  therefore  pressure  over  the  ischium 
may  be  great,  but  this  can  be  relieved  by  raising,  lower- 
ing, or  abducting  the  limb  from  time  to  time.  The 
skin  surface  lying  under  the  ring  should  frequently  be 
changed  and  kept  dry  and  well  powdered.  The  foot 
end  of  the  splint  must  be  either  slung  or  supported 
to  prevent  pressure  under  the  heel,  and  if  the  foot  has 
been  left  free  it  should  be  supported  at  right  angles  by 
a  pillow  or  otherwise. 

LEG 

Fractures  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  tibia  or  fibula,, 
and  fractures  through  the  ankle-joint,  I  treat  in  a 
skeleton  splint,  such  as  I  have  illustrated  (Fig.  in). 
It  allows  of  easy  access  to  the  wound,  and  can  without 
difficulty  be  modified  to  suit  a  special  case.  Fortunately, 
in  gunshot  wounds  the  spiral  fracture  is  rare,  and, 
generally  speaking,  one  bone  remains  unbroken.  The 
treatment,  therefore,  of  fractures  of  the  leg  does  not 
present  so  much  difficulty  as  does  that  of  fractures  of 
I* 


122  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

the  thigh.    For  transport,  however,  and  for  general  com- 
fort, the  splint  should  immobilize  the  knee  (Fig.  112). 

SKELETON   OR  RECTANGULAR  FOOT  SPLINT 

Measurements  required  for  Skeleton  Splint  :  Tread  of 
great  toe  to  heel. 

Measurements  required  for  Rectangular  Foot  Splint  : 
Tip  of  great  toe  to  heel. 

Splint  Measurements  :  The  same,  but  any  adult  size 
is  easily  adapted. 

These  splints  are  usually  applied  to  feet  which  are, 
or  are  required  to  be,  held  at  right  angles.  When  this 
is  not  the  case,  it  is  advisable  to  alter  the  splint's  angle, 
or  a  pressure  sore  may  result  to  the  heel  which  is  not 
lying  in  its  appointed  place. 

Rectangular  Foot  Splint  too  Large. — Of  no  conse- 
quence unless  marked,  when  a  pad  will  be  required 


Fig.  112. — Skeleton  splint  applied. 

above  insertion  of  the  tendo  Achillis  to  prevent  pressure 
on  the  heel  ;  and  a  skeleton  splint  will  require  a  local 
splint  or  its  substitute  to  the  sole  of  the  foot. 

Skeleton  Splint  too  Short. — The  foot-piece  of  the 
splint  can  be  lengthened  by  a  local  flat  splint  or  its 
substitute. 

Nursing  Hint  for  Patient  with  Skeleton  Foot  Splint. 
— This  splint  should  be  supported  on  a  graduated  pillow 
which  is  thicker  under  the  knee. 

FRACTURES  OF  THE  UPPER  LIMB 
ARM 

Fractures  through  the  shoulder-joint  and  through  the 
surgical  neck  of  the  humerus  require  no  splints.  The 
elbow  should  be  slung  at  right  angles,  and  fixed  by  a 
broad  bandage  to  the  side.  The  dressings  would  prob- 
ably replace  the  usual  pad  in  the  axilla,  which  should 
never  be  bulky.  Shoulder  shields  are  unnecessary  and 
cumbrous.  The  patient,  when  practicable,  should  be 
treated  in  the  upright  position,  and  should  have  his 
liead  and  shoulders  well  propped  at  night. 


FRACTURES:    WAR   CONDITIONS     123 

When  ankylosis  is  to  be  expected  after  a  bad  smash 
and  suppuration  of  the  shoulder,  and  opportunity  is 
afforded  for  continuous  treatment,  the  arm  should  be 
kept  abducted  slightly  forwards  and  rotated  slightly 
inwards  (Figs.  113  and  114).  This  assures  a  much 


Fig.  113. — Splint  to  keep  the  arm  abducted  slightly  forwards  and 
rotated  slightly  inwards. 


1 


Fig.  114. — Splint  applied  to  keep  the  arm  abducted  slightly  forwards 
and  rotated  slightly  inwards. 

-extended  range  of  movement  at  a  more  useful  radius, 
such  range  of  movement  being  brought  about  by  the 
action  of  the  scapula.  This  position  need  not  be 
adopted  if  the  patient  has  to  be  transported,  as  it 
can  be  established  after  the  arrival  home.  Fractures 
through  the  elbow  or  immediately  above  the  condyles 


124  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

are  best  treated  without  splints.  If  possible,  the  arm 
should  be  kept  flexed  well  above  a  right  angle.  Sup- 
purating cases  in  the  adult  will  not  admit  of  the  very 
acute  flexion  which  we  insist  upon  in  the  case  of  chil- 
dren. If,  for  a  rare  reason,  a  splint  has  to  be  applied, 


Fig,  115. — Splint  immobilizing  the  elbow-joint  but  allowing  access  to  it. 

the  internal  wooden  angular  splint  must  be  avoided,, 
because  it  is  always  clumsy  and  often  causes  deformity, 
and  a  splint  as  illustrated  used  (Figs.  115  and  116). 

Fractures   of   the  middle  and  lower  middle  portions 
of  the  shaft  of  the  humerus,  where  dressings  have  to- 


Fig.  116.— Elbow  splint  applied. 

be  frequently  changed,  require  very  gentle  handling,, 
and  I  illustrate  two  splints  which  may  be  found  very 
useful.  One  is  a  modified  Thomas  knee  splint  used  to 
maintain  extension  in  the  abducted  position,  the  patient 


FRACTURES  :   WAR  CONDITIONS      125 

being  recumbent  (Figs.  117  and  118).  The  other  is  a 
modified  Thomas  humerus-extension  splint  (Figs.  119 
and  120),  to  be  used  when  the  patient  can  walk  about 
or  sit  up  in  bed.  Either  splint  permits  of  easy  dressing, 


Fig.  117. — Thomas's  knee  splint,  modified,  used  to  maintain  extension  of 
the  humerus  in  the  abducted  position. 


Fig.  118. — Extension  arm  splint  applied. 


and  maintains  adequate  fixation.  As  so  much  destruction 
of  bone  may  be  produced  by  modern'shrapnel,  and  even 
by  rifle  bullet,  great  care  must  be  taken  to  prevent 
over-extension,  otherwise  non-union  will  ensue. 


Fig.  119. — Modified  Thomas's  humerus-extension  splint. 

FOREARM 

The  chief  disability  to  be  feared  in  fractures  of  the 
shafts  of  the  bones  of  the  forearm  is  inability  to  supinate 
the  forearm  completely.  The  trouble  usually  arises 
then  both  bones  are  broken,  but  it  may  occur  when 
we  radius  alone  is  involved.  We  must  remember  that  the 


126  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

whole  length  of  the  posterior  border  of  the  ulna  is  sub- 
cutaneous and  is  practically  straight.  On  this  straight 
ulna  the  curved  radius  rotates,  like  the  handle  of  a 
bucket.  We  must  therefore  attend  to  two  points.  First, 
we  must  keep  the  ulna  straight ;  second,  we  must  not 
interfere  with  the  natural  curve  of  the  radius.  That  is 
to  say,  there  must  be  no  lateral  pressure  of  bandage 
or  splint  on  the  middle  of  the  shaft  of  the  radius.  In 
dealing,  therefore,  with  these  fractures,  whether  one 


Fig.  120. — Modified  Thomas's  humerus-extension  splint  applied. 

or  both  bones  be  broken,  the  position  of  supination 
should  invariably  be  maintained.  This  is  even  more 
important  in  septic  compound  fractures  than  where  no 
complication  exists.  Neglect  of  this  important  point 
will  often  result  in  a  locking  of  the  bones  in  pronation. 
We  must  remember  that  in  nearly  all  neglected  fractures 
of  the  forearm,  supination  and  not  pronation  is  defective, 
the  arm  being  usually  fixed  in  the  pronated  position. 

WRIST  AND  HAND 

Gunshot  wounds  through  the  wrist  are  very  common 
and  far  too  many  have  been  treated  with  the  hand  in 
line  with  the  forearm — that  is,  midway  between  palmar 
and  dorsiflexion.  This  is  fatal  to  good  function.  All 
injuries  of  the  wrist-joint  should  be  treated  in  the 
dorsiflexed  position,  as  shown  in  the  illustration,  in 


FRACTURES:    WAR   CONDITIONS      127 

order   that   the   fingers    may   maintain   their   grasping 
power  (Figs.   121,   122,   123,   124,  and  125).     Fractures 


Fig.  121. — Hyperextension  hand  splint. 


Fig.  122. — Hyperextension  hand  splint  applied. 

of  the  hand  may  be  immobilized  as  shown  (Figs.  126 
127,  and  128). 

Care  must  be  taken  to  fit  the  wrist  flexion  accurately 


Fig.  123.— Skeleton  hyperextension  hand  splint. 


Fig.  124. — Skeleton  hyperextension  hand  splint  applied. 

to  the  splint  flexion,  thus  avoiding  any  possible  strain 
of  the  carpal  joints. 

RETENTION  OF  LOOSE  PIECES  OF  BONE 
I  do  not  intend  to  deal  with  the  surgical  considerations 
involved   in  the   treatment  of  the  suppurating  wound. 


128  NOTES  ON  MILITARY  ORTHOPEDICS 

Many  distinguished  surgeons  are  devoting  themselves 
to  this  problem.     It  may  be  well,  however,  to  offer  a 


Fig.  125. — Skeleton  hyperextension  hand  splint  applied. 


Fig.  126.— Long  hand  splint. 


Fig.  127.— Long  hand  splint,  with 
thumb-piece. 


word  of  warning  against  the  destruction  of  loose  pieces 
of  bone  removed  from  the  wound.  If  quite  loose  they 
can  be  taken  out,  cleaned,  and  replaced.  Suppurative 


Fig.  128. — Long  hand  splint  applied. 

compound  fractures  unite  well  if  time  be  given  them  ;  a 
common  source  of  failure  is  due  to  the  removal  of  bone. 


INDEX 


ABDUCTION  frame,  115 

modified.  115 

—  nursing  patient  on,  116 
Albee's  operation,  88 

sliding  inlay  method,  91,  93 

Alignment,  erroneous,  in  fractures  of 

femur,  77 
Angular    deformity    in    fractures    of 

femur,  76 

Ankle-joint,  functional  impairment  in 
fractures  about,  71 

position  of  election  for  anky- 

losis  of,  after  gunshot  wounds, 
7 
Ankylosis,  positions  of  election  for,  r 

• in  ankle,  7 

— •  in  elbow,  3 
in  flail-joint,  8 

in  forearm,  3 

in  hip,  5 

• in  knee,  6 

• in  shoulder,  i 

—  in  tarsus  and  meta- 
tarsus, 7 

in  wrist,  4 

Anterior     crural    paralysis,     tendon 

transplantation  in,  20 
Arm,  fractured,  treatment  of,  under 
war  conditions,  122 

BICKERSTETH,  Mr.,  and  tendon  trans- 
plantation, 16 

Body  weight,  deflection  of,  14 
Bone  grafting,  63 

conclusions  as  to,  94 

for  recent  fractures,  91 

for  ununited  fractures,  92 

technique  of,  for  fractures 

and  defects  in  con- 
tinuity, 90 

• "general,  86 

—  grafts,  autogenous,    superiority 

of,  82 

—  means  to  promote  growth 
of,  84 

. —  nutrition  of,  83 

theories  of  growth  of,  8t 

— . union  of,  83 


Bone  grafts,  use  of,  in  acute  osteo- 
myelitis, 85 

uses  of,  in  military  s-.ir- 

gery.  85 

loose  pieces  of,  retention  of,  127 

Boot  and  iron   for   Pott's   fracture, 

69 

•  Army,  imperfections  in,  45 

proper  time  to  serve  out, 

45 

for  acute  flat-foot,  31 

for  deformities  from  injuries  of 

tarsus  and  metatarsus,  8 

for  metatarsalgia,  57 

good  marching,  qualities  of,  44 

with  bar  across  sole,  8,  53 

•  with  heel  raised  on  inner  side, 

8,  31,  37,  44,  53 

CARPUS,  fractures  of,  functional  im- 
pairment in,  71 
Claw-foot,  38 

fifth  degree  of,  43 

first  degree  of,  38 

fourth  degree  of,  42 

second  degree  of,  39 

third  degree  of,  42 

Colles's  fracture,  inefficient  reduction 
in,  66 

Compound  comminuted  fractures,  re- 
tention of  fragments  in,  65 

DAMMING  and  percussion,  62 
Deflection  of  body  weight,  how   to 

avoid,  14 
Delayed  union,  60 

causes  of,  61 

in  femur,  62 

in  tibia  and  fibula,  62 

most  common  sites  of,  60 

in  compound  comminuted 

fractures,  65 

treatment  of,  61 

. •  by    percussion    and 

damming,  62 

Displacement  of  little  toe,  55 
Dorsiflexion  of  ankle,  loss  of,  in  frac- 
tures about  joint,  73 


129 


130 


INDEX 


Dorsiflexion  of  wrist,  importance  of, 

in  ankylosis,  4 
Double  circular  saw  for  tutting  bone 

grafts,  87 
Drop-foot,  tendon  fixation  in,  23 

ELBOW  splint,  124 

Elbow-joint,    fractures   about,    func- 
tional impairment  in,  70 

—  ankylosis  of,  position   of  elec- 

tion for,  3 
E version  of  foot  in  fractures  about 

ankle-joint,  71 

External  popliteal  paralysis,  tendon 
fixation  in,  22 

transplantation 

in,  22 
Exuberant  callus,  65 

FAULTY  alignment  of  bones  from  in- 
efficient fixation, 
67 

from     yielding     of 

callus,  69 

Femur,  delayed  union  in,  62 

fractured,    treatment  of,  under 

war  conditions,  112 
— :  fractures     of,    functional     im- 
pairment in,  75 

malunited,  treatment  of,  77 

Fibula  and  tibia,  delayed  union  in,  62 

fractured,    treatment    of, 

under    war    conditions, 

121 

Fixation,  spinal.    (See  Spinal  fixation) 
Flail-joints,  ankylosis  of,  8 
Flat-foot,  28 

acute,  29 

boots  for,  31 

treatment  of,  30 

clinical  division  of  forms  of,  36 

diagnosis      between       different 

forms  of,  36 

—  from  periarthritis,  32 

—  from  peroneal  spasm    34 

—  ordinary,  36 

—  osseous,  34 
— —  rigid,  32 

—  subacute,  36 

—  traumatic,  32 
Foot,  arches  of,  27 

—  deformities  and   disabilities   of, 

28 
Forearm,     fractured,     treatment     of, 

under  war  conditions,  125 
Fractures,    bone    grafting    for,    tech- 
nique of,  90 

—  functional  impairment  in.     (See 

Functional  impairment) 

malunited  and  ununited.     (See 

Delayed  union ;    Malunion) 


Fractures,  recent,  bone  grafting  for,  91 
—  time  required  for  consolidation 

of.  95 

treatment  of;  under  war  condi- 
tions, no 

— —  arm,  122 

forearm,  125 

hip  and  upper 

thigh,   i i z 

—  leg,  121 

—  lower  spine  and 

pelvis,  no 

—  upper     middle 

and       lower 
thigh,  116 

wrist  and  hand, 

126 

Functional  impairment  in  fractures, 
69 

about  ankle-joint,  71 

•  about  elbow-joint,  70 

—  of  carpus,  71 

of  femur,  75 

of  humerus,  70 

—  of  radius  and  ulna, 

7i 

—  of  tibia,  75 

GUNSHOT  wounds  of  joints,  position 
of  election  for  ankylosis  after. 
(See  Ankylosis,  positions  of  elec- 
tion for) 

HALLUX  rigidus,  45 

after-treatment  of,  52 

boot  for,  53 

—  treatment  of,  46 

—  valgus,  47 

and   hallux    rigidus,  rela- 
tion between,  46,  48 
post-operative   splint   for 

52 

treatment  of,  49 

Hammer-toe,  53 

—  splint  for,  55 

treatment   and   after-treatment 

of,  54 
Hand  and  wrist,  injured,  treatment 

of,  under  war  conditions,  126 

—  splints,  127 

Heel,  painful  conditions  of,  57 
Hibb's  operation  for  spinal  fixation, 

88 

Hip    and    upper     thigh,     fractured, 
treatment  of,  under  war  condi- 
tions, 112 
Hip-joint,    ankylosis   of,    position    of 

election  for,  5 

"  Hollow  "  foot.     (Sie  Claw-fooO 
Humerus,    fractured,     treatment    of 
under  war  conditions,  122 


INDEX 


Hummis,  fractures  of,  functional  im- 
pairment in,  70 

INEFFICIENT  fixation  after  setting  of 
fracture,  66 

—  reduction,  65 

common  causes  of,  66 

Intramedullary  plug,  93 

JOINTS,  gunshot  injuries  of,  positions 
of  election  for  ankylosis  after. 
(See  Ankylosis,  positions  of 
election  for) 

mobility  of,  and  late  suture  of 

nerves,  10 

KNEE,  cage  support  for,  107          , 
Knee-joint,     ankylosis,     position     of 
election  for,  6 

—  dislocations    of    external     semi- 

lunar  cartilage,  104 

—  fracture  of  spine  of  tibia,  106 

—  internal  derangement  of,  97 

— -  displaced     cartilage 

with  "locking," 
100 

•  — • rupture    of    internaj 

ligament  and  dam- 
age to  semilunar 
cartilage,  97 

•  thickened       cicatrix 

about  semilunar 
cartilage,  99 

—  operation  on  internal  semilunar 

cartilage, 
101 

after  -  treat- 
ment, 103 

—  recurrent  effusion  into,  104 

•  rupture  of  crucial  ligaments  of, 

105 

—  sprain  of   internal   lateral   liga- 

ment of,  96 

—  thickened  retropatellar  pads  of 

fat,  107 

(See  also     Functional     impair- 

ment) 
Kyphosis  after  injuries  to  spine,  85 

LATE  suture  of  nerves,  principles  of, 

9 

Lateral  graft,  93 

Leg,  fractured,  treatment  of,  under 
war  conditions,  121 

Limbs,  voluntary  use  and  massage 
of,  and  late  suture  of  nerves, 
ii 

Little  toe,  displacement  of,  55 

Lower  spine  and  pelvis,  fractured, 
treatment  of,  under  war  condi- 
tions, no 


McMuRKAY,  Capt.,  aud  tendon  trans- 
plantation, 1 6 

McVViUiains  on  bone  grafts,  81 
Malunion,  65 

causes  of,  65 

Median  paralysis,  tendon  transplant- 
ation in,  19 

Metatarsal  joints,  ankylosis  of,  posi- 
tion of  election  for,  7 

Metatarsalgia,  56 

boot  for,  57 

—  treatment    and  after-treatment 

of,  57 
Morton's  disease,  56 

—  treatment  and  after-treat- 

ment of,  57 

Muscle  fibres,  overstretching  of,  13 
— : —  power,  recovery  of,  late,  14 

•  how  to  secure,  15 

Muscles,  freeing  of,  from  obstruction 
and  late  suture  of  nerves,  10 

—  relaxation  of,  and  late  suture  of 

nerves,  10 

Musculo-spiral  paralysis,  tendon  trans- 
plantation in,  1 8 

NERVES,    injuries    to,    causing    dis- 
ablement of  limbs,  9 

—  late  suture  of,  principles  of,  9 
Nursing    of    patient    on    abduction 

frame,  116 

with  skeleton  foot  splint, 

122 

—  on  Thomas's  double  frame , 

112 

.  with  Thomas's  bed  knee- 
splint,  121 

OPERATION,  immediate,  for  fracture, 

92 

Os  calcis,  spurs  of  bone  under,  59 
Osteitis  and  periostitis  of  os  calcis,  59 
Osteomyelitis,    acute,    use    of    bone 

grafts  in,  85 
Osteotomy  in  claw-foot,  third  degree, 

42 

—  in  hallux  valgus,  49 

in  hammer- toe,  55 

in  malunited  femur,  77 

in  metatarsalgia,  57 

—  in  Pott's  fracture,  74 

in  ununited    fractures   of    tibia 

and  fibula,  62 

—  saw,  author's,  79 

PATELLA,   splitting   of,    in   operation 

for  fractured  tibial  spine,  106 
Paralysis.     (See  various  nerves) 
Pelvis    and    lower    spine,    fractured, 
treatment  of,  under  war  condi- 
tions, no 


132 


INDEX 


Percussion  and  damming,  62 
Periostitis  and  osteitis  of  os  calcis,  59 
Plates    and    screws,    bone    grafts    as 
substitutes  for,  85 

drawbacks  to,  91,  92 

—  use  of,  in  spiral  fracture  of 

tibia,  92 
Poliomyelitis,  treatment  of,  applicable 

to  injuries  to  nerves,  12,  1 6 
Pott's  fracture,  reduction  of,  73 

— inefficient,  66 

Pulley  extension  in  ununited  frac- 
tures of  tibia  and  fibula,  62 

RADIUS  and  ulna,  fractures  of,  func- 
tional impairment  in,  71 

Rectangular  foot  splint,  122 

Retropatellar  pads  of  fat,  thickened, 
107 

Rotation  deformity  in  fractures  of 
femur,  77 

SCIATIC  trunk,  injury  to,  treatment 
for,  25 

Screw  extension  splint,  119 

Shortening  or  overriding  in  frac- 
tures of  femur,  75 

Shoulder-joint,  ankylosis  of,  position 
of  election  for,  i 

Skeleton  foot  splint,  122 

nursing  patient  withi 

122 

Sliding  inlay  method,  93 

Spinal  fixation,  88 

Albee's  operation,  88 

Hibb's  operation,  88 

Spine,  lower,  and  pelvis,  fractured, 
treatment  of,  under  war  condi- 
tions, no 

Spurs  of  bone  under  os  calcis,  59 

Suture  of  nerves,  late,  principles  of,  10 

TAFFIER,  Prof.,  and  transplantation 

of  ovaries,  82 
Tarsal  and  me tatarsal  joints,  ankylosis 

of,  position  of  election  for,  7 
Tendo  Achillis,  injuries  and  strains 

about  insertion  of,  58 
Tendon  fixation  in  drop-foot,  23 

in  external  popliteal  para- 
lysis, 22 

—  transplantation,  16 
—  for  claw-foot,  40 

in  anterior  crucial    para- 

lysis, 20 

in  external  popliteal  para- 
lysis, 22 


Tendon  transplantation  in  median 
paralysis,  19 

•  in     musculo-spiral     para- 

lysis, 1 8 

-  in  ulnar  paralysis,  20 

Thigh, upper,  fractured,  treatment  of> 

under    war    conditions, 
112 

middle  and  lower,  frac- 
tured, treatment  of 
under  war  conditions, 
116 

Thomas,   Mr.   Thelwall,   and   tendon 
transplantation,  16 

Thomas's  knee-splint,  117,  120 
modified,  124 

— -  nursing  patient  with,  121 

double  frame,  no 

—  nursing  patient  with, 
112 

humerus-ex tension  splint,  modi- 

fied   125 

theory  of  "  muscle  lengthening," 

12 

wrench,  33 

Tibia  and  fibula,  delayed  union  inf 
62 

fracture  of  spine  of,  106 

fractures     of,    impai  ment    of 

function  in    75 
Tiptoe  exercises,  37 
Toe,  great,  importance  of,  in  march- 
ing, 44 
Transplantation  of  bone.     (See  Bone 

grafts) 

of  tendon.     (See  Tendon   trans- 

plantation) 

Tuberculous  arthritis  after  injuries  to 
spine,  85 

ULNAR  paralysis   tendon  transplanta- 
tion in,  20 
Union,  delayed.     (See  Delayed  union) 

weak,  65 

Ununited  fractures,  bone  grafting  for, 
90,  92 

(See  also  Delayed  union) 

Upper  middle  and  lower  thigh,  frac. 
tured,  treatment  of,  under  war 
conditions,  116 

WEAK  union,  65 

Wrist  and  hand,  fractured,  treatment 
of,  under  war  conditions,  129 

ankylosis     of,     importance     of 

dorsiflexion  in,  4 
position  of  election  for,  4 


PRINTED  BY  CASSELL  &  COMPANY,  LTD.,  LA  BELLE  SAUVAGE,  LONDON,  E.C.  4 
F  50-317 


University  of  Toronto 
Library 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

Under  Pat.  "Ref .  Ind«  File" 
Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU